Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 5048 - Contract - Pharr & Company - Northwest Branch Library - 12_07_1995Resolution No. 5048 December ], 1995 Item #19 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract and all related documents by and between the City of Lubbock and Pharr and Company of Lubbock, Texas to furnish and install all services and materials as bid for the Northwest Branch Library, which contract is attached hereto, which shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be apart -eft s Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail. Passed by the City Council this .VID R. LANGSTON, ATTEST: Be M. Johns -A, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: -�Zt& 6)::!"- Victor Kilman, Archasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: Dbefild G. Vandiver, First Assistant City Attorney DGV: dp\ccdocs\L.ibrary.Res November 22, 1995 r r 1- A pv@�@@t Nalmu@0 i LUBBOCK TEXAS LUBBOCK CITY - COUNTY LIBRARY NORTHWEST BRANCH MWM ARCHITECTS, INC. LUBBOCK, TEXAS MIDLAND, TEXAS HUGO REED AND ASSOCIATES, INC. CONSULTING CIVIL ENGINEERS LUBBOCK, TEXAS ROBERTS AND THOMA, INC. CONSULTING STRUCTURAL ENGINERS LUBBOCK, TEXAS AGN EW ASSOCIATES, INC. CONSULTING MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS LUBBOCK, TEXAS 13 .13--1 PROJECT NO. 1194--1 0 .I - co F F City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 806-767-2167 Office of Purchasing ALMLED TO VENDOR November 10,1995 CLOSE DATE: November 16,1995 @ 2:00 PAL TTB #13408 - NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY ADDENDUM #1 The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named TTB. Where any item called for in the TTB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affectod by this addendum, shall remain in effect. Please modify or amend Invitation To Bid documents per attached sheets. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806)767-2164 PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WTTH YOUR BID n IMIA loran.• ADDENDUM NO. 1 LUBBOCK CITY -COUNTY LIBRARY NORTHWEST BRANCH PROJECT NO. 1194-1 LUBBOCK, TEXAS MWM ARCHITECTS, INC. NOVEMBER 9, 1995 The following shall be incorporated in and become a part of the original drawings and specifications of the above referenced Project. Please acknowledge receipt of this addendum by noting it on your proposal. A. IN THE SPECIFICATIONS DATED 10-11-95: Make the following modifications: 1. SECTION 08710, PART 3, Subsection 3.3, HARDWARE SCHEDULE; - page 6, under HEADING #1; delete the number 11313" preceding the words "VON DUPRIN1' and substitute in its place "US 26D". - page 6, under HEADING #2; delete the numbers "313" and 11313 AN" preceding the words "VON DUPRIN" and substitute in its place "US 26D". - page 7, under HEADING #5A; delete 11US10" preceding the word "HAGER" and substitute in its place "US 26D11. Delete the number 11313" preceding the words "VON DUPRIN" and substitute in its place "US 26D11. Delete 11US10" preceding the word "TRIMCO" and substitute in its place "US 26D11. - page 8, under HEADING #6; delete the number "10/11 preceding the text in line 4 concerning Push/Pull Latch. - page 9, under HEADING #11; delete the number 11313" and "313 AN" preceding the words "VON DUPRIN" and substitute in its place "US 26D". B. gN THE DRAWINGS DATED 10/11/95: Make the following modifications: 1. On Sheet SP-1; delete detail 11/SP-1 as shown on the attached/revised SP-1 dated 10/11/95. 2. On Sheet SP-2; please note the detail number as shown on the attached/revised SP-2 dated 11/7/95. 3. On Sheet A-1; please note the revised detail numbers dated 11/7/95 as shown on the attached/revised A-11 dated 11/7/95. 4. On Sheet A-2; please note the deleted exit light as shown on the attached/revised A-2 dated 11/7/95. Addendum 1 page 2 Northwest Branch Library r r" 5. On Sheet A-3; please note the relocated tapered insulation cricket for RTU#4-95 and the revised detail number as shown on the attached/revised A-3 dated 11/7/95. 6. On Sheet A-4; please note the revised detail numbers as shown on the attached revised A-4 dated 11/7/95/ t 7. On Sheet A-5; please note the added detail references and the revised detail numbers as shown on the attached/ revised A-5 dated 11/7/95. 8. On Sheet A-6; please note the revised detail numbers as shown on the attached revised A-6 dated 11/7/95. 9. On Sheet A-7; please note the revised detail numbers as shown on the attached/revised A-7 dated 11/7/95. 10. On Sheet A-8; please note the revised detail number as shown on the attached/revised dated 11/7/95. 11. On Sheet MPE-1; Remove all references to add alternate number two. Lighting fixture type "H1" at parking lot entrance shall be provided under base bid. 12. On Sheet E-1; Make the following corrections to the light fixture schedule: TYPE VOLTAGE MAUNFACTURER CATALOG NO. LAMPS NOTES D 120 PRF.SCOLITE 129OMS-10OMHFE-994 1-100W/MH --- F 120 KIM AFL I175MH120 BL-P 1.175W/MH 4. H 120 SPAULDING 4CEI-S250-111-VG-CS-BZP 1-250W/HPS S. H 1 120 SPAULDING 10E1-S250-IV-VG-CS-BZP 1.250W/HPS 6. 13. On Sheet E-1; Make the following corrections to the light fixture schedule notes:* S. Mount fixtures to Spaulding model number 30-SQS-607-QUAD-D. r^ Provide fixture with type 3 distribution. Paint pole to match fixtures. 6. Mount fixtures to Spaulding model number 30-SQS-607-SGL-D. Provide fixture with type 4 distribution. Paint pole to match fixtures. Attached hereto are ten (10) revised DRAWING sheets. r END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 fi r i 1 s CITY OF LUBBOCK REQUEST FOR BIDS FOR TITLE: NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS BID NUMBER: 13408 PROJECT NUMBER: 9932.9211 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT INDEX 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS 4. PAYMENT BOND 5. PERFORMANCE BOND 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 7. CONTRACT 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 10. SPECIFICATIONS II. SPECIAL CONDITION No Text PW r ! NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID #13408 Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 16th day of November,1995, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 7th day of December,1995, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., in the amount of 100/6 of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Ratin of B or superior, as the rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00 the said statutory bonds will not be required. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the IL order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions ' under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a,pre-bid conference on 9th day of November, 1995, at 10:00 o'clock am. in the Purchasing Conference Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas. i Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to arty contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, i minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid 1 openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806)767-2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. r CITY OF LUBBOCK I VICTOR KILMAN ` PURCHASING MANAGER I Bid documents may be obtained upon request from I MWM Architects, Inc. at 2574 74th Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423, (806)745-7077. r L. L L L- L� L. L. L._.._. L- L-- L L- L: L--L r. L.-' L..._-. L� . L- GENERAL rNSTRUCT IONS TO BIDDERS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The contractor shall furnish all labor, supe tendence, machinery, equipment ui ment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract docume is for the NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction rof this project and shall be responsible for tie satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. l 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that 1 parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable o portunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract docume , may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. BIDDER INQUIRIES No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification concerning r this bid must be addressed to: F RON SHUFFIELD SENIOR BUYER CITY OF LUBBOCK P.O. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 FAX (806)767-2164 5. THE AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract do�uments shall be fully completed within 245 (TWO HUNDRED FORTY- consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecu a the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor t submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ' completion of the project within the time specified. 6. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be ma a in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 7. AFFIDAVITS OF BELLS PAID The City of Lubbock nerves the right, prio to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by F the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 8. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 10. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 11. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended ^ contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 12. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 13. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities h. E, aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 14. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and r when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. r 15. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. F F F F Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from. injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 16. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 17. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall firrther state that all subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. is. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be F applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owners Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is. no longer dangerous to property or life. 19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 20. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 21. PREPARATION FOR BID The bidder shall submit his bid on forms finTdshed by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. Each bid shall be enclosed in a scaled envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: F 22. (a) Bidder's name (b) Bid for (description of the project). Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 9 L, La -- L_— L_ L ` L L..._. [____.., L— L,. y CL— , r F I PW I 7 F r F F BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT PLACE: Lubbock DATE: November 16, 1995 PROJECT NUMBER: 13408 - NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY Bidof Pharr Construction Co., Inc. d/b/a Pharr & Company (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: Th.e Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY Bid #13408 Project #9932.9211 having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. Three Hundred Eighty-seven 'Thousand Nine Hundred MATERIALS:--- Forty-eight and no/100--- — ------ ---- (S 3R7 Q48 00 ) Two Hundred Fifty-eight Thousand Six Hundred SERVICES: Thirty-two and no/100------------------------- (S 258 f;';7_nn ) Six Hundred Forty-six Thousand Five Hundred TOTAL BID: Eighty and no/100-------------------- -- - (S 64 F gun _ nn ) ALTERNATE NO. 1: Provide an alternate price to change the running bond for the Face Brick Type "B" accent stripes to a soldier bond as illustrated in the Drawings. MATERIALS:__ Two Thousand Four Hundred Sixty-,on,,and 8n/inn ----- (S 2,461.80 ) SERVICES: One Thousand Six Hundred Forty -arse and 20/100----- (S 1,641.20 ) TOTAL ALTERNATE NO. 1 (ADD) : Four Thousand One Hundred Three and (S 4 ,103.00 ) no/100------------___----_ .--- ALTERNATE NO.2: Provide an alternate price to change the built-up asphaltic roof membrane to a modified bituminous roof membrane. R-19 rigid insulation to remain as specified. MATERIALS: Three Thousand Six Hundred Sixty-three and no/100-- (S 3,663.00 ) r SERVICES: Two Thousand Four Hundred Forty-two and no/100--- (S 2,442.00 ) TOTAL ALTERNATE NO.2 (ADD) : Six Thousand One Hundred Five and (x 6,105.00 ) no00--------------------------- ALTERNATE NO.3: Provide an alternate price to add a layer of 5/8" gypsum wall board (GWB) on treated l" X 4" wood furring at 16" on center (horizontal) to all exposed CMU surfaces up to the ceiling plane as illustrated in the Drawings. SERVICES: Qn _ Tho as nd Fair H m red Ninety,►-t wp and nn/l nn--- (S 1 499 nn ) r F C, TOTAL ALTERNATE NO. 3 (ADD) :_ Three 'Thousand Seven Hundred Thirty _ (S 3,730.00 ) and no/100------------ ALTERNATE NO.4: Provide an alternate price to add the plaque. I MATERIALS: Two Hundred Ninety-two and 20/100-------------- -- (S 292.20 ) SERVICES: One Hundred Ninety-four and 80/100----------------- ($ 194.80 ) TOTAL ALTERNATE NO.4 (ADD) : Four Hundred Eighty-seven and no/100- (S 487.00 ) ALTERNATE NO. 5: Provide an alternate price to change the wood post supported fence, to a steel post set in a continuous concrete curb base fence (refer to Details 5 & 6 on Sheet SP-2). r MATERIALS: Four Thousand Three Hundred Sixty-one and 40/100---- (S 4,361.40 ) L SERVICES: Two Thousand Nine Hundred Seven and 60/100------- -- ($ 2 0907.60 ) TOTAL ALTERNATE NO. 5 (ADD) : Seven Thousand Two Hundred Sixty-nine (S 7, 269.00 ) and ALTERNATE NO.6: Provide an alternate price to add the exterior signage. MATERIALS: Nine Hundred Nineteen and 20/100--- ------ ----------- S 919.20 SERVICES: Six Hundred Twelve and 80/100--- ----- -------------- (S 612.80 ) TOTAL ALTERNATE NO.6 (ADD) : One Thousand Five Hundred Thirty-two (S 1,532.00 ) and no/100---- ALTERNATE NO.7: Provide an alternate price to add trowel on dampproofing. rMATERIALS: Two Thousand Four Hundred and no/100-------------- (S 2,400.00 ) f VICES: One Thousand Six Hundred and no/100--------------- S 1A0,00 rTOTAL ALTERNATE NO.7 (ADD) : Four Thousand and no/100------------ (S 4,000.00 ) k r 7 i ALTERNATE NO.8: Provide an alternate price to add a bicycle rack and concrete parking pad. fr MATERIALS:Sax Hundred Sixty and no/100-- (S 660 _ nn ) SERVICES: Four Hundred Forty and no/100-------------------- ($ 440 _ nn ) TOTAL ALTERNATE NO. 8 (ADD) : one Thousand One HLmdred and nn/1 nn--- (S 1 ,1 nn _ nn ) A ALTERNATE NO.9: Provide an alternate price to add an 18" wide X 4" deep concrete strip around the perimeter of the building except where base bid site concrete will be installed. MATERIALS: One Thousand One Hundred Twenty-five and no/10)----- (S 1,125.00 ) SERVICES: Seven Hundred Fifty and no/100---------------- (S 750.00 ) TOTAL ALTERNATE NO.9 (ADD) : One Thousand Eicrht HLmdred seyenty- (S 1 ,g7S _ nn ) five and no/100------ (Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written 'Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 245 (TWO HUNDRED FORTY-FIVE) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $200 (TWO HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date speed in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. r Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified [ check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5% ) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for N/A Dollars (S N/A ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of 5% of total amount bid Dollars (S 52 ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days t after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the ( undersigned upon demand. r r Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. r Bidder acknowledges addenda #1 and #2 p' tractor Pharr, Vice -President (Printed or Typed Name) i- Pharr Construction Co., Inc. (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) A ST: Secretary Jackie Miller F d/b/a Pharr & Compan Company P.O. Box 2791 Address Lubbock, , Lubbock City, County Texas 79408 State Zip Code Telephone: ( 806 ) 763-5263 Fax Number: ( 806 ) 763-5843 7 1. 2. PM 3. 4. S. 7 6. 7. E�E 8• k 9. 10. l.. E 1. 7 i. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Minority Owned Yes No Yzk ❑ 0 ❑ 0 ❑ 0 ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ELI r UNITED STATES FIDE LIARANTY COMPANY o pan BID BOND BONDNUMBER .................................................................................... . .. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: THAT ...... Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company ...................................................................................................................................... . ....... . ................................................................ .................................................................................................... . .............. of .... ................................................... . ................ ................................................................................................ . ........................................................... as Principal and UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, a Maryland corporation, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto .................................... . ................................................. . . ..........................City ... Of .. I.12111.1ock .............. . ................................................................................................................................... . ................ . . 4.� PERCENT OF AMOUNT BID BY PRINCIPAL------------ asObligee, in the full and just sum of ....... .............................................................................................................................................. . .......... =- ....... Dollars, ................................................ .................................................... ............................. ................. . ......................... . lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the said Principal Is herewith submitting its proposal 0 Northwest Branch Library, Bid #13408 Project #9932-9211 THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the aforesaid Principal shall be awarded the contract the said Principal will, within the time required, enter into a formal contract and give a good and sufficient bond to secure the performance of the terms and conditions of the contract, then this obligation to be void; otherwise the Principal and Surety will pay unto the Obligee the difference In money between the amount of the bid of the said Principal and the amount for which the Obligee legally contracts with another party to perform the work if the latter amount be in excess of the former, but in no event shall liability hereunder exceed the penal sum hereof. n, Signed, sealed and delivered ........11-16-95.................................................. (Date) Pharr ... Con.s.t.ructi.o.n ... Co .......... Inc ...... dba Cor ......... ......... .. .. ........ ..... .. ... ...... . . ........ . ......... .... ........ ; . ... . .......................... .... .................... ...............................................(SEAL) John K. Pharr, Vice —President UNITED 7ATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY . . . ... .... . .. e,.L� I . .... .................................... Staci Gross Attorney-Ifl-fact 4".w4i'm, �jghikrl i Contract I I (Revised) (1-74) ny 4 r• UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY r t l.� F I r POWER OF ATTORNEY NO. 108673 1148984 �USF+G' IIS11AIti KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That UNITED STATES FIDII.TIY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, a eorpotuion organized and ousting under the laws of the State of Maryland and having its principal office at the City of Baltimore, in the State of Maryland, does hereby constitute and appoint Donal Boley, Steve Deal, Laura Espinoza and Staci Gross oftbe city of Wichita Falls , state of Texas its true and lawful Attorney(s)io-Fact, cub in their separate capacity if mote than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to. and to execute. seal and acknowledge any and all bonds. undertaldngs, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Company in its business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons; gua=teeing the performance of contracts; and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In Witness Whereof, the said UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY hu caused this instrument to be sealed with its corporate seal, duly :nested by the signatures of its Senior Vice President and Assistant secretary, this 5 th day of August . AM. 19 94 • UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY MUNNam Im (signed) By...%....... . . .. ........................ p� Senior Vice President (Signed) By ........ ................. ........................... STATE OF MARYLAND) SS BALTIMORE CITY ) On this 5th day of August A.D. 19 94 ,beforemepersonallyeame Robert J. Lamendola Senior Vice President of the UNrrM STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY and Paul D. Sims . Assistant Secretary of said Company, with both of whom I sm persouslly acquainted. who being by we severally duty sworn. said. that they, the said Robert J . Lamendola and Paul D . Sims were respectively the Senior Vice President and the Assistant Secretary of the said UNTIED STATES FIDEU Y AND GUARANTY COMPANY. the corporation described in and which executed the foregoing Power of Attorney; that they each knew the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said Power of Attorney was such corporate seal, that it was so affi.•ted by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that they signed their acmes thereto by like order as Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of the Company. My Commission expires the llth day in%March A.D. 19 �9955�. (Signed)l}� NOTARY PUBLIC This Power of Attorney is granted under and by authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of the UNTIED STATES FIDELrlY AND GUARANTY COMPANY on September 24, 1992. RESOLVED. that in connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company. all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other imstmrnents relating to said business may be signed, executed. and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attoraey(s)-b-Fact pursuant to t Power of Attorney issued in accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in tb.- name and on behalf of the Company, either by the Chairman, or the President. or an Executive Vice President, or a Senior Vice President, or Vice President or an Assistant Vice President, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary. under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoing officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Attomey(s)-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the mature thereof, and, unless subsequently revoked and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid Lad binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond orundertaking to which it is validly attached. RESOLVED, that Attorneys) -in -Fact shall have the power and authority, unless subsequently revoked tad, in any carte, subject to the terms and limitations of the Power of Attorney issued to them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings. and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by such Attorneys) -in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company. I, Paul D . Sims , an Assistant Secretary of the UMrED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, do hereby certify that the foregoing is a true excerpt from the Resolution of the said Company as adopted by its Board of Directors on September 24, 1992 and that this Resolution is in full force and effect I, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the UNTIED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect and bas not been revoked. In Testimony Whereof. I have hereunto set my hand and the seal r5TAAND GUARAN] IY COMPANY om this 16 day of NoV2I1tbE?l:' .1�� . ......................................... aomsan N 1t108 Assistant Secretary FS 3 (10-92) r LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS r^ Minority Owned k k Yes No r. 1. ❑ ❑ 2. ❑ ❑ 3. ❑ 0 4. 0 ❑ S. ❑ 0 6. ❑ ❑ 7. ❑ ❑ 8. ❑ 0 9. 0 0 10. 0 ❑ r� r r MYNEW BOND goPJD CHECK BEST RATING. LICENS I TEXAS t4g v�- d, BY 15:07 12zi9/195 PHARR & Co SF-1220 806 763 5843 PAGE 04 7 STATUTORY PAYMENT 13OND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160 OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS �- AS AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 56TH LEGISLATURE. REGULAR SESSION, 1959 Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that / (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and United States Fidelity & Guaranty Company (hereinafter called iha Surety(s), as Surety(s), are hold and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Dollars (S 657 , 290 ._09lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, suoeessors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entcrcd into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated. the _jam day of December , 19 95 , to and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED,140WEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended by Acts of the 56th Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. TN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 12th day of na ember 19--Qa' Pharr Construction Co., Inc. United States Fidelity & Guaranty Company dba Pharr & Company Surety Principal ►- �,i� By: �! (Title) Ple)John K. Pharr, Vice -President `--- By: (Title) By: (Title) 7 15:07 12/19/195 PHARR & CO SF-1220 806 763 5843 .-" PAGE 05 The undersigned surety Company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates hropshi re Agency, Irrc. an agent msident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom semoe jr of process may be bad In matters arising out of such suretyship. Shropshire Agency, Inc. Surety Approved as to form: r ! City of Lubbock L r Dy Barney * Note: If signed by an of oer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this r' person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our flies. t: r /, 1148996 UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY P t POWER OF ATTORNEY tk U S F+W7 NO. 108673 I I S I KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PPXSENTS: Mist UNITED STATES FIDELT Y AND GUARANTY COMPANY, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Maryland and having its principal office at the City of Baltimore. in the State of Maryland, does hereby constitute and appoint Donal Boley, Steve Deal, Laura Espinoza and Staci Gross ofthe city of Wichita Falls , State of Texas its tsar and lawful Attorney(s)min-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Company in its business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons; guaranteeing the performance of contacts; and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In Witness Whereof. the said UNIT® STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY has caused this instrument to be sealed with its corporate seal, duly attested by the signatures of its Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary, this 5 th day of August , A.D. 19 94 - G&A10UNITED STATES FIDELAND GUARANTY COMPANY .IIY (Signed) By—/...... ( Senior Vice President (Signed)B ....... ...tr• • • • •�^:..:.. • • • ... ............. 3 '.�} stant Secretary p, STATE OF MARYLAND) \I�-V SS: BALTIMORE CITY ou this 5 th day of August , �19 ,before me perso ` 46w Robert J . Lamendola Senior Vice President of the UNITED STATES FIDELITY ANDCOIv;= Paul D MS . Assistant Secretary of said Company, with both of whom I am petso o being ffe rally duly that they the said Robert J . Lamendola and Paul D. '4� were respcdenior Vice President and the Assistant Secretary of the said UNTIED STATES FIDELITY AND GU COMPANY, �on descneinch executed the foregoing Power of Attorney; that they ` each knew the seal of said corporation; that th , to said Po A mey was suchseal, that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that they signed their mama thereto by like as Senior Via Pr sistant Secretary, rwipectively, of the Company. r.. My Commission expires the llth daytin reh II.1995. r (Si `,. R • ,�. O NOTARY PUBLIC 1 This Power of Attorney is granted under and � of the following Resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of the UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY on September , 1992: RESOLVED, that in connection with the futility and surety iinmmce business of the Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other instruments r, relating to said business may be signed, executed, and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attorneys) -in -Fact pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued in accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company, either by the Chairman, or the President, or an Executive Vice President, or a Senior Vice President, or a Vice President or an Assistant Vice President, jointly with the Secretaryor an Assistant Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers maybe engraved, printed or Lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoing officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing rAttorney(s)-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, sad, unless subsequently C revolted and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile sea shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is validly attached. RESOLVED, that Attomcy(s)-in-Fact shall have the power and authority, unless subsequently revoked and, in any case, subject to the terms and limitations i of the Power of Attomey issued to them to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings, and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof; and any such instrument executed by such Attorneys) -in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an Executive Officer and sealed and -tested to by the Secretary of the Company. L Paul D . Sims , an Assistant Secretary of the UNITED STATES FMMM AND GUARANTY COMPANY, do hereby certify that the foregoing is a tram excerpt from the Resolution of the said Company as adopted by its Board of Directors on September 24. 1992 and that this Resolution is in full force and effect L the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. In Testimony Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and the seal of �e p STAT/E�S FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY on this 1 2th day of DeCPlTb21" ,19 95. ............................................. sanrmrrn i 1998 Assistant Secretary a . wrp F5 3 (10.92) f. PERFORMANCE BOND BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENSE' W TEXAS DATE BY G✓ r 15:06 12/19/195 PHARR & CO SF-1220 806 763 5943 PAGE 02 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160 OF THE REVISED CIVIL, STATUTES OF TEXAS AS r- AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 56TH LEGISLATURE, REGULAR SESSION 1959 KNOW ALL A4BN BY THESE AMHNT9, of ucti�on Co .(bek OJ, Mlcd'&rPrTnc %iff, VPrincipal(s), and United States Fidelity & Guaranty Company (hereinailcr called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are hold and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Dollars ($6 5 7.2 9 0.0 0 lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and .Surety "themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the ]may of December .1995to Bid #13408-Northwest Branch library and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a plrt hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise to remain in toll force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amcndod by Acts of the 56th Legislature, regular session 1959, and all liabilities on this bond sliall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Decem)e WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signal and sealed this instrument this 12tday of ,19 United States Fidelity & Guaranty Company Surelyza By: � (Title) d Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Companv Principal By: h (Ti John K. Pharr, Vice —President By: (Title) By: (Title) r 15:06 12/19/195 PHARR & CO SF-1220 806 763 5843 PAGE 03 I The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualitled to do business In Texas, and hereby designates r%ropshi re AgenC.y,Inc an agent tesidcnt In Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices maybe delivered and on whom service of 1process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Shropshire Agency, Inc. Surety F Approved as to Form City of Lubbock i � sy. C3 Attorney 'r Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on rile a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must haw copy of prover of attorney for our filos. 77 PM i 4 i `ft 6, y i f r L- L__: [- L--� L__: L-w L— L__. L.� L_: L___ t- L- L--_, L—' L- L- L— L 11 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK DATE: P.O. BOX 2000 TYPE OF PROJECT: LUBBOCK, TX 79457 THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT (Name and Address of Insured) is, at the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for the typed of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this company, the further hereinafter described Exceptions to standard policy noted hereon. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER EFFECTIVE EXPIRATION LIMITS DATE DATE GENERAL LIABILITY ❑ Canmercial General Lability General Aggregate S ❑ Claims Made Produam-Comp/Op AGO S ❑ Occurrence Personal & Adv. Injury S 0 Owner's & Contractors Protective Each Occurrence S 0 Fire Damage (Any one Fire) S Mod Exp (Any one Person) S AUT1OMOTIVELIABLU77 0 Any Auto Combined Single Limit S ❑ All Owned Autos Bodily Injury (Per Person) S ❑ Scheduled Autos Bodily Injury (Per Accident) S ❑ Hired Autos Property Damage S ❑ Non -Owned Autos GARAGE L64BILITY ❑ Any Auto Auto Only - Each Accident S ❑ Other than Auto Only - Each Accident S AggrWW S 0 BUILDER SRISK 0 100%ofthe Total Contract Price S 0 P=ALLATTONFLOATER S EYCESSLL4BILPIY 0 Umbrella Form Each OccurrenceS Aggregate S 0 Other Than Umbrella Form S WORKERS COWE VSATIONAND EWL0YERS'LL4BILITY The Proprietor/ 0 Included Statutory Limits PartnervExecutive 0 Excluded Each Accident S Offnoers are: Disease Policy Limit S Disease -Each Employee S OTHER The above policies either in the y thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or canceled by the insurer in less utan ute iegai ume regtunm aver me insurea nas recetvea wnuen notice or such cnange or canceuauon, or in case there is no legal requirement, in less than live days in advance of cancellation. FIVE COPIES OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE MUST BE SENT TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK (Name of Insurer) By: Title: CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Appropriate Insurance AgenttBroker Prior to Award of Contract I, the undersigned Agent/Broker, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Contractor. If the below identified Contractor is awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) days after being notified of such award by contractor, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. Agent (Signature) Name of AgentBroker: Address of Agent/Broker: City/State/Zip: AgentBroker Telephone #: ( ) Date: CONTRACTOR'S NAME: (Print or Type ) CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS: Agent (Print) NOTE TO AGENTBROKER If this time requirement is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806)767-2165. BID #13408 - NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY F F F jI CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: F REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at S 12-440-3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and Sling of any coverage agreements -for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and ` (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the I duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, 1 (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (1) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing r' services.0 b Q F 7 CONTRACT F F F F r STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 7th day of December,1995, by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through David R. Langston, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and PHARR & COMPANY of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, and the State of Texas, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #13408 - NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY - $657,290.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have year and day first above written. ATTEST: &'(*'— Secretary ATTEST: Corporate Secretary agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas, in the .YOR CONTRACTOR: COMPLETE ADDRESS: Pharr & Company P.O. Box 2791 Lubbock, Texas 79408 r GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT f^^ r r GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1 OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. r 2. CONTRACTOR k Whenever the word Contractor, or the -expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: PHARR & COMPANY, who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or -to bis or their legal representative. r 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE l Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to JEFF RI PPEL, LIBRARY DIRECTOR City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect constrictions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the rContractor or men acting in behalf of the Contractor. 1 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS j" The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, ( Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in • accordance with the Notice to Bidders. S. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of F like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor.for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. w. I 8. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractoes layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of his onsite observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 1 d 14 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representatives' estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract. The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorizes to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications. provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his decision. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERJNTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Ownet's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained 18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such man or men shall be — discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any work found to be defective or not in — accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's — Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons -- competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. F 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor fiMher agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by -the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, howevcr, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (15%) percent. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements 7 of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbitration as herein below provided. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other — contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, — he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. K at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of — compliance with the schedule of progress.. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and — others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the r execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent Contractor, inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. "` t: 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be Carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations r.. Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury (with exclusion "c" waived) 9 d . B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, S 1.000,000 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, 1000 000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the t. endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance i The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of 1,000,000 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance; a certificate of authority to self - insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (1WCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in 0406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has _ employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. r 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. -- 4. If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. S. The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing — services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one r� year thereafter. 7. The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, _ within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor. (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage "' Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of I compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. — (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten (10) days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current _ certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and _ (ii) no later than seven (7) days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; — (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report r (h) r 7 failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the projec4 regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512-440-3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (iv) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (1.1), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29, DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than 15 employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY. EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power,tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after _ demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner, provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by Owner is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, " which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING The Contractor further agrees that be will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement. rW C 34. TM E FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of S200 (TWO HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the, breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment. It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract. 35. T1ME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. EXTENSION OF TIME The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood The Contractor may apply in writing for an extension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall dLen consider such written request and respond to Contractor in writing granting or rejecting the request for an extension of time to complete the project r 7 t 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTTTIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is r let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other -- contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, ~ which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the ` Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the existence or character of the work 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all -' materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth (15) day of the current month the total amount of the C Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less five percent (5916) of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sunsthat may be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or f negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage due Contractor. 43. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor. 44. FINAL PAYMENT Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and f prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st day after the date of certificate of rcompletion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual f obligations under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fuMllment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' prenuses all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written .- notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at. Contractor's expense. 46. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYNSNT *" Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy arty defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. i y� t 47. PAYMENT LLD The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 48. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents. 49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra -- Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner, or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to C' the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase 4 t shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and + delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within thirty (30) days after the date of certificate of completion In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less [hart that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the •jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners. 50. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the 1 work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the ground that have not been 1 included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorporated into the work Thereupon, the Ownees Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the prices stated in the attached bid, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement. 51. BONDS The sucaessfirl bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 1001/o of the total contract price, in the event said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so firrnished. F F 52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 53. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative ^ hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 55. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. t.�: Lr...� L �..,. C� t. .� �: L�: � t.w i.. _�: L..� i� � L....�: t:,._: t ��:.�.�: L....�s C.:w� !� C..�.. Resolution #2502 January 8, 1987 Agenda Item #18 F F F F DGV:da f?PM IITTIIM WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984; and WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents and purposes: Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades Exhibit B: Paving and Highway.Construction Trades Exhibit C: Electrical Trades Exhibit D: Overtime Rate Exhibit E: Weekend and Holiday Rate Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. Passed by the City Council this 8th day of January , 1987. Ranett6.,Boyd, City Secretary APPROVED T ONTENT: Bi 1 PXyne, Dilrector of Building Services z h oe-04 B.C. McMINN, MAYOR APPROVED AS TO FORM: �Do�IdG.�Vand&ver,First Assistant City Attorney r L: EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Acoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter ' Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger Electrician Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator - Heavy Light Floor Installer Glazier Insulator, Piping/Boiler Insulator -Helper Iron Worker Laborer, General Mortar Mixer Painter Plumber Plumber -Helper Roofer Roofer -Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper Welder - Certified Hourly Rate $11.60 8.35 5.50 .10.50 5.00 11.00 5.50 7.35 8.70 10.50 5.25 8.00 5.70 8.00 7.50 9.50 5.00 7.30 4.75 5.60 8.75 9.25 6.00 7.65 4.75 8.75 5.50 8.00 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Asphalt Heaterman Asphalt Shoveler Concrete Finisher Concrete Finisher -Helper Electrician Flagger Form Setter Form Setter -Helper Laborer, General Laborer, Utility Mechanic Mechanic -Helper POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS Asphalt Paving Machine Bulldozer Concrete Paving Machinist Front End Loader Heavy Equipment Operator Light Equipment Operator Motor Grade Operator Roller Scraper Tractor Truck Driver - Light Heavy Hourly „Rate $5.25 4.75 7.35 4.75 10.50 4.75 6.50 5.50 4.75 5.80 6.50 6.00 6.00 5.25 6.50 5.85 6.40 6.40 8.00 5.25 5.25 5.50 5.25 5.25 u EXHIBIT C Electric Construction Trades Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Power Line Foreman $11.00 Lineman Journeyman 10.45 -� Lineman Apprentice Series 8.90 Groundman Series 7.25 EXHIBIT 0 Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2 times base rate. -- EXHIBIT E Prevailing Wage Rates Weekend and Holiday Rate The rate for weekend and holiday is 1 1/2 times base rate. No Text �� 7 PPol@@ft manus0 LUBBOCKyTEXAS LUBBOCK CITY - COUNTY LIBRAY NORTHWEST BLANCH MWM ARCHITECTS, INC. LUBBOCK, TEXAS MIDLAND. TEXAS HUGO REED AND ASSOCIATES, INC. CONSULTING CIVIL ENGINEERS LUBBOCK, TEXAS ROBERTS AND THOMA, INC. CONSULTING STRUCTURAL ENGINERS LUBBOCK, TEXAS AGN EW ASSOCIATES, INC. CONSULTING MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS LUBBOCK, TEXAS PROJECT Vt'%wM'94-1 r I NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 F SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. The Project includes the construction of new parking and driveways, site work, canopies and an enclosed building housing lobby, operational and public library facilities for the City of Lubbock as shown on contract documents prepared by MWM Architects, Inc., dated 10/11/95. The work consists of the following: 1. New building structure and canopies constructed on a site located at the North side of 19th Street at Dover Ave. 2. Site work including drives, parking and perimeter curbs and gutters with new sidewalks along 19th Street. 3. All necessary permits required for the work. 1.3. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. It is anticipated that this work may commence by January 1, 1996, all as shown on the Drawings. 1.4. WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Separate contracts will be issued by the City of Lubbock to perform furniture purchase and installation, telephone cabling and computer cabling, landscaping and irrigation. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete during the Contract Time for the Northwest Branch Library Work or sometime thereafter. P B. The Texas Department of Transportation has issued a contract to widen 19th Street at various points and complete other work within the street right-of-way. I C. Coordinate the Project Work with the City of Lubbock and Texas Dept. of Transportation seperate contract work. D. See Construction Schedule Bar Chart requirements in SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS. l .. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1 r 6 . NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1.5. CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. General: Limit use of premises to construction activities in areas indicated; allow for Owner Occupancy and use by the public at the perimeter of the site. All outside storage shall be limited to the areas shown within the Limits of Construction as shown on the drawings. 1. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated by the property line perimeter. Portions of the site beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed. The Contractor shall erect and maintain in good condition a construction fence encompassing the Contract limits. Fence shall be a minimum of sixty inches (6011) high and shall have a maximum opening of six (611). Posts shall be sturdy and gates shall be provided as required. At Substantial Completion this Contractor shall remove the fence and leave the site in the same condition as it was before construction operations began. 2. The Contractor shall cooperate with other Contractors on the site to ensure that all operations are maintained with no interruptions. 3. Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner, and other contractors at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site. 1.6. OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy the site during part of the entire construction period.- Cooperate with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to — interfere with the Owner's operations. B. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building, prior to Substantial Completion provided that such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. . 01010 - 2 SUMMARY OF WORK FNORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1. A Certificate of Substantial Completion will be executed for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner occupancy. 2. Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational. Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully P., completed. Upon occupancy the Owner will provide operation and maintenance of mechanical and electrical systems in occupied portions of the building. 1.7. PROJECT CLOSEOUT: A. Project As -Built Documents: The Contractor shall keep a record set of drawings, specifications and all submittal data on the job at all times. Record of miscellaneous changes or job adjustments (whether or not included in a Change Order) shall rbe recorded by the General Contractor for all trades and sub- contracts. At job closeout two sets of diazo mylar As -Built documents shall be submitted for review and acceptance. Final payment will not be made until the As -Built Documents have been accepted. Do not use the As -Built documents for construction reference and use. B. As noted in General Conditions the contractor shall furnish releases and waiver of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract before final payment. Releases from all sub -contractors and suppliers shall be required. 1.8. SITE INVESTIGATION: A. It is required that, before submitting a proposal, the Contractor shall have investigated the site and determined to his own satisfaction the site conditions and limitations insofar as they will affect his work. B. A soil investigation was conducted at the site. A report was prepared by Terra Engineers, Inc. and is available for review by the Contractor from either the Owner or the Architect. C. Underground Utilities: Failure of the drawings to show underground utility lines or other concealed piping, wiring and the like shall not be construed as a guarantee on the part of the Architect or the Owner that such conditions do not exist, though unknown. All operations involving excavations or removals shall be done at the risk of the Contractor who shall take the necessary precautions to protect employees and the public from injury or death and to avoid damage to existing systems. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 3 F r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 D. Any and all materials to be excavated shall be considered as unclassified and as such the contractor shall assume _ responsibility for excavating to the depths and limits as required by the plans, specifications, and contract documents. 1.9. REFERENCE STANDARDS: A. All standards such as those issued by the American Society for Testing and Materials, American Standards Association, -' Federal, Military, or General Services Administration specifications which are referred to in this specification shall be considered as included herein by reference and unless — a date or other designation is given which establishes the date of publication, it shall be that issue which is current at the time of the bidding. 1.10. DEBRIS: A. All debris of any nature such as broken concrete, torn out masonry, plaster, excess fill, crates, cartons, etc. shall be the entire responsibility of the Contractor who shall remove the aforementioned debris from the site and legally dispose of same. 1.11. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION: A. Storage Sheds: Shall be confined to the Construction Areas shown on the Drawings. 1. Provide, maintain and remove when directed, suitable, _ substantial, water -tight storage facilities in which to store all materials which would be damaged by the weather. All Storage space shall be of sufficient size to hold all such materials, required on the site at one time and if _ the storage space is an outside building, it shall have floors raised at least 6" above the ground, on heavy joist or sleepers. B . Temporary Toilets: Shall be confined to the Construction Areas shown on the drawings. 1. Post notices, take such precautions as may be necessary, and do any cleaning necessary to keep the building and premises in a sanitary condition. At the beginning of the work provide on the premises where approved, suitable temporary toilets and enclosures for the use of all workmen on the job, including separate contractors, and 01010 - 4 SUMMARY OF WORK NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 maintain same in sanitary condition and remove same and all its contents upon completion of the building. C. Temporary power and lights: Provide temporary power and lights as required for the project. D. Temporary water: Provide temporary water as required for the project. 1.12. CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL: A. The Contractor shall employ a competent Superintendent to be in attendance at the job site whenever any work is being performed. B. The Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system and perform such inspections as will assure that the work performed will conform to the Contract requirements. C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective quality control program which will assure that all supplies and services required shall conform to the Contract requirements whether constructed or processed by the Contractor, or r" procured from Sub -contractors at any tier, or from vendors and suppliers. 1.13. OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT: A. Bidders shall review the Williams-Stieger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and all subsequent revisions and amendments thereto and Rules and Regulations (hereinafter referred to as OSHA) implementing the provisions of such Act prior to the submission of their proposals to perform the work to be accomplished under this contract. Bidders shall, in preparing their bid proposals, make adequate allowances for the strict compliance with OSHA and any subsequent Rules and Regulations having the force of law. 1.14. ACCESS TO WORK: A. The Owner or any one he may designate, the Architect and his representatives shall at all times have access to the work wherever it is in preparation of progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper and safe facilities for such access and for inspection. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 5 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1.15. TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICE A. The General Contractor shall furnish and maintain throughout the construction phase a temporary field office. B. The General Contractor shall provide both a telephone and fax -, machine which will be available to all persons connected with the work; however, the Contractor shall not be liable for long distance calls except those authorized by himself. C. The General Contractor shall provide suitable toilet facilities for all workmen and shall remove same at completion of work. Provide a suitable blind at all temporary toilets. 1.16. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Drawings and Specifications are intended to describe and provide for a finished and complete piece of Work. And as such, though the Drawings and Specifications may be diagramic and may not show, indicate or specify all necessary off -sets, appendages) and/or apparatus (s), it is the intent -- thereof for the General Contractor to provide all necessary items for a finished and complete operational pieces) of work. All Work must meet the requirements r_ of all the applicable and governing laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of the locality. B.. No extra compensation will be allowed for oversight of any such requirements, except by written order issued by the Owner. C. Should any doubt., arise regarding Drawings or Specifications, clarification shall be requested of the Architect. Failure to do so will not relieve the _ Contractor from the responsibility to complete the work .to the Owners satisfaction. D. The arrangement of the specifications is intended as a _ convenience to the Contractor and others connected with the work. No responsibility direct or implied is assumed by the contractor or his subcontractors due to real or alleged error in the arrangement of the specifications. E. In case of conflict between the drawings and specifications or between large and small scale drawings or between ^` specifications and schedules the Architect will determine the requirements to use; but, in general, the material, equipment, or method producing the best quality construction -� in the opinion of the Architect will be used. 01010 - 6 SUMMARY OF WORK ._1 r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 F. The mention of certain items in the specifications or drawings to the exclusion of others; or the mention of work to be done in a specific area to the exclusion of similar work required in other areas; or the failure to cross-reference related work specified elsewhere, shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility under the Contract Documents. G. The segregation of the various parts of the work under headings, by trades, does not relieve the Contractor of the responsiblility for furnishing every item shown on the Drawings or mentioned in the specifications or reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to produce the intended results in a first class manner. 1.17. CODES AND ORDINANCES A. Materials and construction shall conform with applicable requirements of the latest edition of the following documents: 1. Uniform Building Code, latest edition. 2. The National Electric Code, latest edition 3. Uniform Plumbing Code and Uniform Mechanical Code, latest editions. 4. The Rules and Regulations of the Board of Underwriters Laboratories. S. Occupational Safety and Health Act. 6. All State, National Codes, Ordinances, Rules and Regulations, not specifically mentioned above but which apply to the proposed construction. 7. In any case of conflict between any of the documents mentioned above, the highest requirements shall govern. No extras shall be allowed for any changes to make the work conform with the regulations of the above mentioned documents; they shall be considered as completely included in the Contract Price. Nothing in these plans and Specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. r., B. All applicable State laws, municipal ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the contract throughout, and they will be deemed to be included in the Contract the same as d though herein written out in full. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1.18. EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES A. Existing underground lines occur in the site where the '- work is to be done. The Contractor shall visit the site and determine the location of all utility lines. Existing lines shown in the Drawings are not guaranteed as to size and location or for completeness. Any utility line which interferes with the new construction and is not to be relocated, removed or rerouted by others and/or is to remain on the site as shown in the Drawings, shall be relocated or rerouted by the Contractor as directed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner. 1.19 LAYOUT OF THE WORK A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the layout of the work in strict compliance with the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable). END OF SECTION 01010 01010 - 8 SUMMARY OF WORK r 6 LUBBOCK CITY - COUNTY LIBRARY NORTHWEST BRANCH CITY COUNCIL 1993 DAVID R. LANGSTON. MAYOR M.J. 'nUD' ADERTON ALEX 'TY" COOKE MAX INCE RANDY NEUCEDAUER T.J. PATTERSON MACC1E TREJO LIBRARIES BOARD CITY COUNCIL 1995 DAVID It. LANGSTON. MAYOR ALEX 'TY" COOKE VILTOR HEICNANDEZ MAX INCE RANDY NEUCEOAUER T.J. PAIYERSON WINDY SITTON HELEN OTKEN. CHAIR 1003 MILDRED 0E0 CARICOL HOLLEY. CHAIR 1090 DUKE IIOL,IES NADINE DARTSCII UONNER SMITH ALICE CHAVEZ 4-1 CITY MANAGER BOB CASS DIRECTOR STRATEGIC PLANNING JIM BERTRAM DIRECTOR, CULTURE AND LEISURE SERVICES CAROLYN MCCORUICK—ALIAMUS LIBRARY DIRECTOR JEFFREY RIPPEL MWM ARCHITECTS. INC. NUCO REED AND ASSOCIATES. INC. tow"Ll" as adc" .. Wm"& ua.. ROBERTS AND THOMA. INC. coKxu.o m.rnww uriia � G T-4 "aw .0 gu "aw"mINC. I"" XYZ CONSTRUCTION UdOWA w.. CONSTRUCTION SIGN NOTES: 3/4 INCH EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWOOD, TREATED 4"x4" SUPPORTS WITH ADEQUATE TREATED 2x BRACING, I BACKGROUND COLOR SHALL BE WHITE, LETTERING COLOR SHALL BE BLACK, PROVIDE TWO (2) SIGNS - LOCATED AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT. MOUNT THE SIGN AT THE HEIGHT SO THE BOTTOM OF THE SIGN IS LOCATED ABOVE THE TOP OF THE FENCE, NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 SECTION 01023 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS AS INDICATED IN THE GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT - ITEM 52 SPECIAL CONDITIONS, THE FOLLOWING SPECIAL CONDITIONS SHALL CONTROL OVER THE AFOREMENTIONED GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT. -M - . 7. . - Add the following paragraphs after the first paragraph: "The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site.,, "Information or services under the Owners control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work." "Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, Thirty (30) copies of Drawings and Project Manuals for execution of Work." . In line 2 the successful Contractor shall be named. Add the following paragraphs after the first paragraph: "The Contractor shall supervise and direct Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for the layout and coordination of all portions of the Work under the Contract." "The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor." Add the word "Architects..." before the word "Engineers,in line four. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01023 - 1 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 Add the following sentence to the end of the paragraph: "Any and all communications between the Owner, the Owner's Representative and the Contractor involving change order(s), construction change directive(s) and/or orders for a minor change(s) in the Work shall go through the Architect." Add the words "...Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract..." after the word "...Plans..." in line three. In lines three and four of the first paragraph and line seven of second paragraph add: "and the Architect" after "Representative". Add the following paragraphs after the second paragraph: "Whenever in the Specifications or drawings accompanying this agreement, the terms of description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship, or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their nature, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the Owner's Representative, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms, or clauses defining the character of the work." "In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an", but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement." "In case of conflict between drawings, specifications, large and small scale details, schedules or other parts of the Contract Documents, the Owner's Representative and/or Architect will determine the requirements to use; but in general, the material, equipment or method producing the best quality of construction in the opinion of the Architect will be used.,, Add the following paragraphs after the first paragraph: "A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. 01023 - 2 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor." "A Sub -subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub -subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub -subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub -subcontractor." "The preeceeding two (2) paragraphs shall not limit claimants who have furnished labor and/or material in the procecution of the work from filing claims for payment." "Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection." "By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with the respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub - subcontractors. The. Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01023 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 Subcontractor will be bound, and upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the'Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their proposed Sub -subcontractors." General Conditions - Item #11 In line one delete the words "one copies" and substitute "Thirty (30) copies". General Conditions - Item #13 Delete the entire paragraph. General Conditions - Item #15 In lines two, six and eight, after the word "subordinate" add the word "Architect". General Conditions - Item #16 In line one the third paragraph, after the words " The Owner or Owner's Representative" add the words "...and the Architect or his Consultants..." Add the following after the third paragraph: "The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work." General Conditions Item 4*21 In lines one and two of paragraph two, after the words, "Owner's Representative" add the words, "or Architect". ^ General Conditions - Item #27 In the first paragraph, line eighteen and thirteen, after the word "employees" add the words "including the Architect and his Consultants"... Also name "Architect" in articles A, B, C, E and F as additional insured. 01023 - 4 SPECIAL CONDITIONS F FNORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 General Conditions - Item #30 In line one of paragraph one, after the word "Owner" add the words "and Architect and his Consultants..." General Conditions - Item #31 In lines four and seven, after the word "Owner" add the words "and Architect and his Consultants". P General Conditions - Item #32 In line two of paragraph one, after the word "Owner" add the words "and Architect and his Consultants". General Conditions — Item #38 Delete Item #38 General Conditions - Item #39 In line five, after the word "Owner" add the words ".., the Architect and his Consultants". General Conditions - Item #42 r In line one of the first paragraph, delete the word "tenth" and add "25th". In lines one and two of the first paragraph, after "Owner's Representative" add the words"and the Architect". In line five of the first paragraph after "materials delivered" add "and suitably stored...". * Add the following paragraphs which, as such, shall constitute Item #57. Item #57 - Basic Definition "The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the �• Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a l SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01023 - 5 i r E NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 part of the Project." "The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors." "The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams." "The Specifications are the portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services." "The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications." * Add the following paragraphs which, as such, shall constitute Item #58: "The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required to be consistent with the Contract Documents and what is required from them as being necessary to produce the intended results. "Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade." "Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings such as found in the Illustrated Encyclopedic Dictionary of Building and Construction Terms by Hugh Brooks." * Add the following paragraph which, constitute Item #59 01023 - 6 as such, shall SPECIAL CONDITIONS r F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 .- .f, . • tr r. -M. "The Drawings Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect are instruments of the Architect's service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, sub -subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner and Architect. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors,and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's copyrights or other reserved rights." * Add the following paragraphs which, as such, shall constitute Item #60. -„ - "The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The tern "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative." SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01023 - 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 * Add the following paragraphs which, as such, shall constitute Item #61. "In accordance with the Owner's Contract with the Architect, the Architect's Administration of the Contract shall consist of the following activities:" "The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with other provisions of the Contract." "The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's responsibility. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractor, or their agents or employees, or of any other persons performing portions of the Work." "Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate through the Architect. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner." "The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or 01023 - 8 SPECIAL CONDITIONS NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 r performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the f: responsibility of the contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under the Contract. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which ,. the item is a component." "The Architect will assist the Owner's Representative in the preparation Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work not affecting a change in r• cost or time." "The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such request will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 working days after written request is made for them." "Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith." "The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents." END OF SECTION 01023 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01023 - 9 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 r SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates. B. Definition: An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described in Contract Documents. C. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project. D. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each Alternate. Indicate whether Alternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to Alternates. E. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the Work described under each Alternate. 1. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). FALTERNATES 01030 - 1 r� t NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1. SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1: Provide an alternate price to change the running bond for the Face Brick Type 'B' accent stripes to a soldier bond as illustrated in the Drawings. B. Alternate No. 2: Provide an alternate price to change the built-up asphaltic roof membrane to a modified bituminous roof memberane. R-19 rigid insulation to remain as specified. C. Alternate No. 3: Provide an alternate price to add a layer of 5/8-inch gypsum wall board (GWB) on treated 1 x 4 wood furring at 16 inches on center (horiz.) to all exposed CMU surfaces _ up to the ceiling plane as illustrated in the Drawings. D . Alternate No. 4 : Provide an alternate price to add the plaque. E. Alternate No. 5: Provide an alternate price to change the wood post supported fence, to a steel post set in a continuous concrete curb base fence (refer to Details 5 & 6 on Sheet SP-2) . F. Alternate No. 6: Provide an alternate price to add the exterior signage. G. Alternate No. 7: Provide an alternate price to add trowel on dampproofing. H. Alternate No. 8: Provide an alternate price to add a bicycle rack and concrete parking pad. I. Alternate No. 9: Provide an alternate price to add an 18-inch wide x 4-inch deep concrete strip aroungd the perimeter of the building except where base bid site concrete will be -" installed. END OF SECTION 01030 01030 - 2 ALTERNATES NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 F F r d ' SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1. Requirements of this Section apply to all portions of the work including mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Division-15 and Division-16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. C . In general all cutting and patching shall be performed in such a manner as to provide a finish appearance similar to the wall, floor and ceiling conditions that existed in the space being altered. Finishes shall be as near the existing adjacent finishes as possible. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Where approval of procedures for cutting and patching is required before proceeding, submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of the time cutting and patching will be performed and request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the proposal: 1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required and how it is to be performed; indicate why it cannot be avoided. 2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction; include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's appearance and other significant visual elements. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work. 4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching is to be performed. 5. List utilities that will be disturbed or affected, including those that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out -of -service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. 6. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the Architects right to later require complete removal and replacement of a part of the Work found to be unsatisfactory. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load - carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio. 1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following structural elements: a. Foundation construction.. b. Bearing and retaining walls. c. Structural concrete. d. Structural steel. e. Lintels. f . Structural decking. g. Miscellaneous structural metals. h. Equipment supports. i. Piping, ductwork, vessels and equipment. B. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems: 01045 - 2 Shoring, bracing, and sheeting. Primary operational systems and equipment. Air or smoke barriers. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. Membranes and flashings. Fire protection systems. Noise and vibration control elements and systems. CUTTING AND PATCHING 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 E h. Control systems. E i. Communication systems. j. Conveying systems. k. Electrical wiring systems. 1. Special construction specified by Division-13 Sections. F C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces or like construction elsewhere to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSPECTION A. Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. 1. Before proceeding, meet at the site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 3.2. PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining -areas. D. Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork serving the building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3. PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled craftsmen to perform cutting and patching. Patching shall be done by craftsmen certified in the particular craft involved. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements to be retained or adjoining construction. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with the original installer's recommendations. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent -fitting and patching _ required to restore surfaces to their original condition. C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 01045 - 4 CUTTING AND PATCHING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. Remove existing floor and C wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch, after the patched area has received primer and second coat. 4. Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of uniform appearance. 3.4. CLEANING A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. END OF SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 5 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including; 1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submittal schedule. 3. Shop Drawings. 4. Product Data. 5. Samples. B. Inspection and test reports are included in Section "Quality Control Services." 1.3. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. SUBMITTALS i a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 01300 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. 4. For material or equipment requiring color selections note that ALL such materials and equipment must be submitted before AU color selections can be made. B. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. 1. On the transmittal Record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. 1.4. CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal — bar- chart type Contractor's construction schedule. Submit within 30 days of the date established for "Commencement of the Work". 1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the _ same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values". 2. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion, Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. — B. Phasing: Provide notations on the schedule to show how the sequence of the Work is affected by requirements for phased — completion to permit Work by separate Contractors and partial occupancy by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion. C. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office. 01300 - 2 SUBMITTALS NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 I 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. D. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule monthly to relect actual work in place to the date of the updatei. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. 1.5. SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar drawings. C. Coordination drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing that show the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or function as intended. 1. Submit coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space. 1.6. PRODUCT DATA A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing -in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings." SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3 r t NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. 2. Submittals: Submit 2 copies of each required submittal; submit 4 copies where required for maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain one, and will return the other marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. 1.7. SAMPLES A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and, finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product, proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture and pattern. 1. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. -� a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3), that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation and similar construction characteristics. 2. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of _ construction. 1.8. ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, 01300 - 4 SUBMITTALS NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics . is the Contractors responsibility. B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable). END OF SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 5 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 7 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 .Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services. B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports, performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect. C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication r and installation procedures, not production of standard products. 6 C 1. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and installation procedures. 2. Inspections, test and related actions specified are not intended to limit the Contractor's quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by the Architect, Owner, or authorities t having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. r t: QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400 - 1 r i, t NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1.3. RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and similar quality control services, specified in individual Specification Sections and required by governing authorities, except where they are specifically indicated to be the Owner's responsibility, or are provided by another identified entity; these services include those specified to be performed by an independent agency and not by the Contractor. Costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Sum. 1. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was the Contractor's responsibility. a. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractor's responsibility, where required tests were performed on original construction. 2. Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to a. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. b. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples. c. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to testing -- laboratories. d. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. e. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site. 01400 - 2 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 t B. Owner Responsibilities: The Owner will provide inspections, L tests and similar quality control services specified to be performed by independent agencies and not by the Contractor. 1. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent agency, testing laboratory or other qualified r. firm to perform the following work: a. Excavation and soils testing. b. On site concrete testing. C. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor and each agency shall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples and similar activities. 2. The Contractor shall notify the Architect and Testing Agency at least 48 hours before an on -site test is required.: PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Nat Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample - taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for "Cutting and Patching." '- B . Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired construction. C. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services. END OF SECTION 01400 7, QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400 - 3 F. F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 SECTION 01631 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2.. SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made before submittal of bidder. 1.3. DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents. B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Bidder before submittal of bids are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered substitutions: �- 1. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 2. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. 3. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. r 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if received in writing not less than fifteen (15) full days prior to the date of the scheduled opening. Requests received less than 15 days shall be returned unopened to the Bidder. FPRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 1 F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the form and in accordance with procedures as outlined in the FTA Guidelines and Regulations. 2. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance .with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation procedures. b. Samples, where applicable or requested. c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect. d. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the owner and separate Contractors, that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, between the substitution and the specified product. g. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal -to or better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time, that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. 3. The Architect will notify the Bidder of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution at least ten (10) full days before the scheduled date for opening of the proposals. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product specified by name. 01631 - 2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. SUBSTITUTIONS A. Conditions: The Bidder's substitution request will be received and considered by the Architect when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect; otherwise requests will be returned Without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents. 3. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted. 4. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved. 7. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate Contractors, and similar considerations. 8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility. 9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. 10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provide the required warranty. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 3 t NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 B. The Contractors submittal and Architect's acceptance of Drawings, Product Data or Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01631 01631 - 4 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 7 SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protection of existing trees. 2. Topsoil stripping. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Removal of trees where indicated. 1. PROJECT CONDITIONS B. Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Protection of Existing Improvements:- Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place. 1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property. 2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property owners. D. Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place, against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing. Any trees or other vegetaion not protected shall be suitably protected and maintained during the Work. SITE CLEARING 02110 - 1 1. NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to maintain their health during course of construction operations. - 2. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch diameter that are cut during construction operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt, or other acceptable coating, formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying.out; cover with earth as soon as possible. 3. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain which are damaged by construction operations, in a manner acceptable to Architect. Employ a licensed arborist to repair damages to trees and shrubs. — PART 2 - PRODUCTS E. Not applicable to this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION ^ 3.1. SITE CLEARING A. General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions as required to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. "Removal" includes digging out and off -site disposing of stumps and roots. 1. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner, where such roots and -- branches obstruct installation of new construction. B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than ;4 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. 1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. a. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. r b. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines to prevent damage to root system. — 02110 - 2 SITE CLEARING F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 2. Stockpile suitable topsoil in storage piles for use in fine grading. Construct storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if i" required, to prevent wind erosion. �.. 3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil same as specified for disposal of waste material. C. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing. Also remove all debris not suitable for fine grading to a depth of 8 inches. 1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface. 2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain. 3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. a. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth, and thoroughly compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground. D. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above -grade and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. 1. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on mechanical or electrical drawings, and is included under work of related Division 15 and 16 sections. Removal of abandoned underground piping or conduit interfering with construction is included under this Section. 3.2. DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on Owner's property. B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and unsuitable or excess topsoil from Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING 02110 - 3 I NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL f.. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, �. apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of earthwork is shown on drawings. B. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements is included as part of this work. C. Backfilling of trenches within building lines is included as part of this work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. rB. Testing and Inspection service ( 1. Owner will engage a soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations. The testing laboratory shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D3740, Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil or Rock Used In Engineering Design and Construction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Test Reports: Submit following reports directly to Architect from the testing services, with copies to Contractor and Engineer. 1. Test reports on existing or borrow material for each type of soil encountered. a. Atterberg Limits b. Linear Shrinkage c. Optimum moisture/maximum dry density curve 2. Field density test reports of subgrades and compacted fills. Reports shall indicate soil type or change of soil if any other is used. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Site Information 1. A subsurface soils investigation at the site has been made. Logs of borings and test data are available for Contractor's information and for his interpretation as to soil and water conditions that may be encountered at the site. 2. Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that the Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. Data are made available for the convenience of the Contractor. 3. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no cost to Owner. EARTHWORK 02200 - 1 d NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. 1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services -~ have been provided. C. Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted. D. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. 1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALSs A. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SC, CL, SM, SW and SP. B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups CH, ML, MH, OL, OH, and PT. C. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, natural or crushed sand. D. Topsoil shall be fertile, natural soil of loamy character, free of clay lumps, stones and debris. E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter. Fill materials shall have a liquid limit between 4 and 30 and the plasticity index shall be between 4 and 12. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION: A. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing required finish grade elevations. B. Earth excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions, and other materials encountered that are not classified as unauthorized excavation. 02200 - 2 EARTHWORK NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3 C. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction 1 of Architect.' Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's expense. r D. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to Architect. E. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations. as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect. F. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect who will make an inspection of conditions. 1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by Architect. r 2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work. r G. Stability of Excavations 1 1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with 'local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. H. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. k1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and f discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 2. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. I. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. r� 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 2. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified. I J. Excavation for Structures 4 1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for rinspection. d EARTHWORK 02200 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. K. Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross -sections, elevations and grades as shown. L. Excavation for Trenches 1. Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. 2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups. 3. Where rock is encountered,- carry excavation 6" below required elevation and backfill with a 6" layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. 4. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe. 5. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18" of column or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footings. 6. Concrete is specified in Division 3. 7. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling authorized by Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. M. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F. (1 degree C.) 3.2 COMPACTION: A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification. B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor); and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship. 1. Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. 2. Building Slabs: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. 3. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% maximum dry density. 4. Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill materials at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. 5. Pavements: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density for cohesive soil material. 6. Pavement Base Course: Compact 6" layer of base material to at least 95% of maximum dry density. Base course to be located over compacted subgrade. 02200 - 4 EARTHWORK NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY II94-5 C. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. 2. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by dicing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. 3.3 BACKFILL AND FILL: A. General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below. 1. In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 2. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 3. Under walks and pavements, use subbase materials, or satisfactory .. excavated or borrow material, or combination of both. 4. Under building slabs, use satisfactory borrow material. 1 B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities. j 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of trash and debris. C. Ground Surface Preparation I. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up so that fill material will bond with existing surface. 2. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. D. Placement and Compaction 1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. 2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift. r r EARTHWORK 02200 - 5 I NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3.4 GRADING: A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. C. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation. 3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1/2" above or below required subgrade elevation. D. Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2" when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. E. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification. 3.5 PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE: A. General: Subbase course consists of placing subbase materials, in layers of specified thickness, over subgrade surface to support a pavement base course. B. See other Division 2 sections for paving specifications. C. Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades -- including crown and cross -slope of subbase course. D. Placing: Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting subbase material during placement operations. E. When a compacted subbase course is shown to be 6" thick or less, place r material in a single layer. When shown to be more than 6" thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6" or less than 3" in thickness when compacted. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Quality Control Testing During Construction 1. Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed. 2. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (Sand Cone Method) or ASTM D 2167 (Rubber Balloon Method), or ASTM D �- 2922, (Nuclear Gauge Method) as applicable. 02200 - 6 EARTHWORK — e� NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-7 B. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade 1. Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case less than 3 tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case less than 3 tests. Subsequent layers shall be placed only after the previous compacted layer has been tested and ,.. approved by the testing laboratory and Architect/Engineer. 7 C. If, in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no additional expense. i. 3.7 MAINTENANCE: A. Protection of Graded Areas q 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: where completed compacted areas are r disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re -shape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. 3.8 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS: A. Removal from Owner's Property 1. Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash and debris, and dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02200 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. F EARTHWORK 02200 — 7 c, J NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 SECTION 02282 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. Provide soil treatment for termite control, as herein r specified. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work, including preparation of substrate and application. B. Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in accordance with regulations of governing authorities for application of soil treatment solution. C. Use only termiticides which bear a Federal registration number of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1.5. JOB CONDITIONS A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations. B. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer. TERMITE CONTROL r- 02282 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1.6. SPECIFIC PRODUCT WARRANTY A. Furnish written warranty certifying that applied .soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites and, that if subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Provide warranty for a period of 5 years from date of treatment, signed by Applicator and Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION A. Use an emulsible concentrate termiticide for dilution with water, specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites. . Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent. Provide a solution consisting of one of following chemical elements and concentrations 1. Chloropyrifos ("Dursban TC"); 1.0 percent in water emulsion. 2. Permathrin ("Dragnet", "Torpedo"); 0.5 percent in water emulsion. B. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if also acceptable to_ Architect, and approved for.intended application by jurisdictional authorities.- Use only soil treatment solutions which are not injurious to planting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1. APPLICATION A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations. Toxicants may be applied before placement of compacted fill under slabs, if recommended by toxicant manufacturer. B. Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follows: C. Under slab -on -grade structures, treat soil before concrete -- slabs are placed, using the following rates of application: 02282 - 2 TERMITE CONTROL r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 r r 1. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. to soil in critical areas under slab, including entire inside perimeter inside of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers. 2. Apply one gallon of chemical solution per 10 sq. ft. as an overall treatment under slab and attached slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel. Apply 1-1/2 gallons of chemical solution to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent material. 3. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. of trench, for each foot of depth from grade to footing, along outside edge of building. Dig a trench 6" to 8" wide along outside of foundation to a depth of not less than 12". Punch holes to top of footing at not more than 12" o.c. and apply chemical solution. Mix chemical solution with the soil as it is being replaced in trench. D. Treat soil under or around crawl -space structures as follows: 1. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. of trench along inside of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partitions, and around piers and plumbing. Do not apply an overall treatment in crawl spaces. 2. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. of trench, for each foot of depth from grade to footing, along outside of foundation walls, including part beneath entrance platform porches, etc. 3. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. along the inside and outside of foundation walls of porches. 4. Apply one gallon per 10 sq. ft. of soil surface as an overall treatment, only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. E. At hollow masonry foundations or grade beams, treat voids at rate of 2 gal. per 10 lin. ft., poured directly into the hollow spaces. F. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated, apply at rate of 4 gals. per 10 lin. ft. of penetration. G. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied.' Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction. H. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 02282 TERMITE CONTROL 02282 - 3 r, e NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 SECTION 02513 - ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL i 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of asphalt concrete paving is shown on the Drawings. General work for fill and sub -grade is specified under Section 2200, Earthwork. Final shaping, filling and compaction of paving sub -grade is specified under this heading. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 6 A. The Owner will provide material and compaction testing services. Tests shall be as directed by Architect. B. Submit 2 copies of a listing identifying the types and sources of materials proposed for the work. No paving shall be started until all materials and methods have been approved by Architect PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. All materials and methods shall be according to Texas Department of Highways and Public Transportation, 1982 Standard Specifications for Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement. B. Flexible Base - Grading Items 248, Type F, Grade 3. 1. The material shall be obtained from approved sources. It shall consist of argillaceous limestone, calcareous clay particles with or without stone, conglomerate, gravel, sand or other granular materials. Where the local material for the base course contains some hard limestone such material must be crushed and graded to comply with gradation requirements as outlined below. The processed material when properly slaked and tested by standard laboratory methods shall meet the following requirements: a. Passing 2" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100% b. Passing #40 sieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 35% c. Passing #200 sieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 - 15% 2. The material passing the 40-mesh sieve shall be known as "soil binder" and shall meet the following requirements: a. The liquid limit shall not exceed 40 b. The plasticity index shall not exceed 12 c. The linear shrinkage shall not exceed 8.0% C. Prime Coat: 1. Asphalt shall be MC-30, Asphalt meeting Texas Department of Highways and Public Transportation specifications. r ASPHALT PAVING 02513 - 1 F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 D. Hot -Mix Asphaltic Concrete - Grading Item 340, Type D 1. A surface course composed of a mixture of mineral aggregates and asphaltic material shall be placed on the primed base. The mixture when designed and tested in accordance with these specifications and methods outlined in the TDHPT Bulletin C-14, shall have an optimum laboratory density of 97% and a stability of not less than 30%. 2. The coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, tough, durable fragments of stone, crushed gravel, gravel or combinations thereof and be retained on a No. 10 sieve. It shall contain not more than 1 percent, by, weight, of organic matter, clays, loam or pebbles coated therewith and shall have an abrasion of not more than 40 percent loss by weight. 3. The fine aggregate shall consist of sand, screenings or a combination of both, and will pass the No. 10 sieve. Sand shall be composed of durable stone particles free from injurious foreign matter. Screening shall be of the same or similar material as specified for coarse aggregate. The plastic index of that part of the fine aggregate passing the No. 40 sieve shall be no more than six (6). 4. Asphalt for the paving mixture shall be of the type and grade of oil asphalt as determined by design tests. The asphaltic material for the tack coat shall be cut -back asphalt, RC-2. 5. The paving mixtures shall consist of a uniform mixture of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate and asphaltic material. The grading of each constituent of the mineral aggregate shall be such as to produce, when properly proportioned, a mixture which will conform to the grading specified.hereafter. 6. Fine Graded Surface Course (TDHPT - Type D): a. Passing 1/2" sieve . . . . . 100% b. Passing 3/8" sieve . .. . 95 to 100% c. Passing 3/8" sieve, retained on No. 4 sieve . . . . 20 to 50% d. Passing No. 4 sieve, retained on No. 10 sieve . . . 10 to 30% e. Total retained on No. 10 sieve . . .. . . . 50 to 70% f. Passing No. 10 sieve, retained on No. 40 sieve . . . 0 to 30% g. Passing No. 40 sieve, retained on No. 80 sieve . . . 4 to 25% h. Passing No. 80 sieve, retained on No. 200 sieve . . . 3 to 5% i. Passing No. 200 sieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 to 8% 7. The asphaltic material shall form from 6.5 to 8.0 percent, by weight, of the mixture. — E. Traffic Markings: 1. Paint shall be a chlorinated rubber base traffic paint, factory -- mixed, quick drying with FS-TT-P-115, Type III or approved equal. The color shall be yellow or white as directed by the Architect. F. Concrete Wheel Stops: 1. Wheel stops shall be as detailed on the drawings. Concrete to be hardrock of 6 sack mix (4,000 psi minimum 28 day strength). Furnish complete with two 5/8" diameter x 18" long steel stakes for each wheel stop.. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUB -GRADE PREPARATION: A. Subgrade preparation will consist of all grading work necessary to bring the subgrade to the lines, grades, and typical cross-section shown on the plans. It will also consist of removing all obstructions 02513 - 2 ASPHALT PAVING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3 encountered in the subgrade area. " B. All areas to be paved shall be excavated or filled and shaped in conformity with the typical sections shown on the plans, and to the lines and grades established in the field. Special care shall, be r Ps exercised in grading street intersections where valley gutters occur, so that the profiles will present a smooth surface. All unstable or otherwise objectionable material shall be removed from the subgrade and replaced with approved material. After all excavation and fill is completed and before placement of flexible base, the subgrade shall be shaped to conform to the established lines and grades and typical cross sections, wetted, and rolled to secure a smooth, firm foundation for the pavement. 3.2 FLEXIBLE BASE: A. Description: This item shall consist of a foundation course for r surface or other base courses; shall be composed of caliche and gravel materials; and shall be constructed as herein specified in one or more courses in conformity with the typical sections and to the lines and grades established on the job. B. Before placing the first course of base material, the subgrade shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches for the full width of the base. After scarifying this layer it shall be compacted by means of wetting, rolling and blading until a density of 95% of the maximum is obtained as prescribed under DENSITIES of these specifications. Subgrade shall then be shaped to conform to the typical section, lines and grades as shown on the plans, and as established in the field. Compacted base course shall be a minimum of 6" thick. C. All unstable or otherwise objectionable material shall be removed and replaced with acceptable material. Any deviation from established line, grade or typical section in excess of 1/2" as shown by straightedge or template when placed as directed, shall be corrected by removing material, reshaping and compacting by sprinkling and rolling. The subgrade preparation operation may be done at the time the grading operation is completed. D. Material deposited on subgrade shall be spread and shaped the same day. In the event inclement weather prevents spreading of the material during the first 24 hours, it shall be scarified and spread as directed by the Architect. E. All areas and "nests" of segregated course or fine material shall be corrected or removed and replaced with well graded material. If additional "Binder" is considered necessary or desirable after the material is spread and shaped, it shall be furnished and applied in the amount directed. Such binder materials shall be carefully and evenly incorporated with the material in place by scarifying, harrowing, brooming, or by other approved methods. The course shall then be sprinkled as required and rolled, as directed until a uniform compaction is secured. Throughout this entire operation the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface upon completion shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical sections shown on the plans, and spots which develop shall be corrected immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding suitable material as required, reshaping, and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling. F. Rolling of base course shall be carried on by the operation of approved pneumatic tire rollers or ten ton rollers, or a combination of the two. F ASPHALT PAVING 02513 - 3 r t t: NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3.3, ROLLING EQUIPMENT: A. Pneumatic tire rollers shall consist of not less than nine _ pneumatic -tired wheels running on two axles in such manner that the rear group of tires will not follow in the tracks of the forward group and shall be mounted in rigid frame and provided with a loading platform or body suitable for ballast loading. The front axle shall rotate around a king pin so located that the roller may be turned in a minimum circle. Under working conditions, it shall have an effective rolling width of 60 inches and shall give a minimum compression of three hundred and twenty-five (325) pounds per inch of tire tread. The pneumatic tire roller shall be driven by either a crawler type tractor or a pneumatic tire tractor and the roller, when drawn by either type shall be considered a pneumatic tire roller unit. A self-propelled pneumatic Lire roller is acceptable. B. Ten (10) ton roller shall be the three -wheel, self-propelled type, weighing not less than ten (10) tons and shall provide a compression of the rear inch of tire width. The rear wheels shall be flat and shall have a diameter of not less than forty-eight (48) inches, and each shall have a tire width of not less than twenty (20) inches. 3.4 ROLLING METHODS: A. Pneumatic tire roller work shall be done as required to compact the base. The embankment layer of the base course shall be sprinkled if directed, and rolling with a pneumatic tire roller shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed towards the center and overlapped successive trips by at least one-half (1/2) the width of the rear wheels of the power roller. On super -elevated curves rolling shall begin at the low sides and progress toward the high sides. Alternate trips of the roller shall continue until the base is finished off. The rollers, unless otherwise directed, shall be operated at a speed between two (2) and three (3) miles per hour. B. Ten (10) ton roller work shall be done as required to compact and finish the base. The embankment layer or the base course shall be sprinkled if directed, and rolling with a power roller shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed towards the center. Overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half (1/2) of the width of the rear wheels of the power roller. On super elevated curves rolling shall begin at the low sides and progress toward the high sides. Alternate trips of the roller shall continue until the base is finished off. The rollers, unless .otherwise directed, shall be operated at a speed between two (2) and three (3) miles per hour. 3.5 DENSITIES: A. It is the purpose of these specifications to obtain an apparent dry density of the minus 1/4" material of 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by the "Standard Proctor Compaction Tests". This density is to be obtained in the top six inches of the subgrade and in the entire thickness of the base course. 3.6 PRIME COAT: A. This item shall include furnishing all material, equipment, labor and whatever else may be necessary for applying a prime coat to the flexible base. B. when the base is finished and thoroughly dry and is satisfactory to receive the prime coat, the surface shall be cleaned by sweeping or other approved methods until all loose material is removed. If necessary the base shall be lightly sprinkled just prior to the application of the asphalt. The asphaltic material shall then be 02513 - 4 ASPHALT PAVING i F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-5 applied to the cleaned base at'the approximate rate of 0.25 gallons square yard of surface area. The application shall be made with approved type of self propelled pressure distributor so constructed operated as to distribute the material evenly and smoothly in quantity specified or directed. Cut -back asphalt shall be applied a temperature between 125 degrees F. and 175 degrees F. per an and the at C. Prime coat shall not be applied when the wind velocity is likely to cause vaporized asphalt to drift onto buildings, adjacent concrete work or other objects subject to damage by such overspray. D. Prior to placement of prime and tack coats, cover curbs and gutters with kraft paper and weight with sand to prevent displacement until such coats are completed. In the event that penetration type paving is called for, paper shall remain in place until the finish course has been applied and rolled. E. No traffic or hauling on the prime .coat shall be permitted until the asphalt is dry enough so as not to track or pick up.. 3.7 HOT -MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE: A. This item shall include furnishing all material, equipment, labor and whatever else may be necessary for placing a hot -mix asphaltic concrete pavement on an approved primed base. The wearing surface shall be completed in accordance with these specifications. B. The surface upon which the asphaltic mixture is to be placed, shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, soil and foreign matter. A tack coat of 0.08 gallons per square yard of RC-2 shall be placed uniformly on the cleaned surface. No tack coat or asphaltic mixture shall be placed when the air temperature is below 50 degrees F. and falling. C. All the asphaltic mixture shall be hauled to the site in tight vehicles which have been previously cleaned and oiled. The dispatching of the vehicles shall be so that all material delivered can be placed and rolled during daylight. D. All contact surfaces of curbs, gutters and valley gutters and all joints shall be painted with a thin, uniform coating of the tack coat material prior to placing the asphaltic mixture. Generally the asphaltic mixture shall be placed with a finishing machine on the prepared base at the rate of 150 pounds per square yard. Spreading by hand may be necessary in areas not accessible to the finishing machine. In either case, the mixture shall be placed in such manner that when properly compacted, the finished surface shall be smooth, of uniform density and will drain. The finished thickness shall not be less than one and one-half (1 1/2) inches. E. Care shall be taken to prevent splattering of adjacent construction during the application of the asphaltic material. F. The material shall be compressed thoroughly and uniformly by rolling with three -wheel and tandem rollers. Rolling shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center of the section, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half the width of the rear wheels. Rolling shall be continued until no further compression can be obtained and all roller marks are eliminated from the surface. All small places not accessible to the roller shall be thoroughly compacted with lightly oiled hand tamps. 3.8 TRAFFIC MARKINGS: A. Apply markings according to a layout approved by Architect. Lines shall be applied in 2 coats by means of mechanical marking equipment. Lines shall be straight, at proper angle and of uniform width. r ASPHALT PAVING 02513 - 5 l NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3.9 PRECAUTIONS: A. Do not lay paving in inclement weather, or when the ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. All paving shall be free from defects such as cracks, spalls, thin spots, soft spots, porous area, slick area, roller markings, vehicular traffic markings. C. Also curbs, gutters, walks and walls of buildings, etc., shall be free of asphalt overspray. Also these items shall not be cracked, chipped or marked by heavy equipment used in paving operations. 3.10 CLEANING: A. Remove from site all rubbish and wasted paving materials. Leave site in a good, clean and neat condition. 3.11 INSPECTION: A. If any defects develop, or if materials and/or compaction tests fail to meet standards, the paving Contractor shall correct, tear out and replace, or take other measures as directed by Architect to put pavement in first-class condition, both in appearance and for utility. B. Care shall be taken to prevent splattering of adjacent construction during the application of the asphaltic material. C. The material shall be compressed thoroughly and uniformly by rolling with three -wheel and tandem rollers. Rolling shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center of the section, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half the width of the rear wheels. Rolling shall be continued until no further compression can be obtained and all roller marks are eliminated from the surface. All small places not accessible to the roller shall be thoroughly compacted with lightly oiled hand tamps. END OF SECTION 02513 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. 02513 - 6 ASPHALT PAVING r d NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 r SECTION 02514 - CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS AND PAVING I. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of concrete curbs, walks and paving is shown on the Drawings. B. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 03300, Concrete Work, for materials, testing, mixing, placing and curing, except as herein specified otherwise. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Grade Controls, Establish and maintain the required lines and grades. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Forms: 1. Either steel or wood, of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use forms that are straight and free of distortion and defects. Bent, twisted, split or defective form materials are not permitted. 2. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. 3. Coat forms with a non -staining, clear, paraffin base form oil that will not discolor or otherwise deface the surface of the concrete. B. Concretes Comply with applicable requirement of Section 03300, Concrete Work, for concrete materials. Concrete mix shall not be the same as used for building slabs and foundations. Exterior concrete shall attain a minimum compressive strength'of 3000 psi at 28 days and shall contain six (6) sacks (564 lbs.) of cement per cubic yard of concrete, 6 percent plus or minus 1 percent of entrained air, coarse aggregate 1" or smaller and shall be poured with a slump of 5" plus or minus 1". C. Fibrous Concrete Reinforcement: (Use in all exterior concrete not otherwise detailed.) 1. General: 100 percent virgin polypropylene fibrillated fibers specially manufactured for use as concrete reinforcement, containing no reprocessed olefin materials. Fibrous concrete reinforcement shall be as manufactured by Fibermesh Company, 4019 Industry Drive, Chattanooga, TN 37416, or approved equal. 2. Physical Characteristics: a. Specific Gravity: 0.91 b. Tensile Strength: 70 to 110 ksi c. Fiber lengths: 1/2", 3/4", 1 1/2", 2" per manufacturer. r" D. Expansion Joints Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth of slab. At curbs and gutters, furnish special section to meet local curb and gutter specifications. r E C CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS AND PAVING 02514 - 1 r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. Remove all loose material from the uniformly compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION: A. Set forms to the required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install sufficient lengths of forms to allow continuous progress of the work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. Tops of walks and paving shall slope at least 1/8" per foot. B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to the following tolerances: 1. Top of form units: Not more than 1/8" in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face: Longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4" in 10 feet. C. Clean forms after each use, and coat with form oil as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT: A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of Section 03300, Concrete work, for mixing and placing concrete, and as herein specified. 2. Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the time concrete is batched in amounts in accordance with approved submittals for this type of concrete. Mix batched concrete in strict accordance with the fibrous concrete reinforcement manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion. 3. Do not place concrete until subgrade and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subgrade as required to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they have been brought to the required grade and alignment. - 4. Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of the mix, and with as little rehandling as possible. Consolidate concrete along the face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies or side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand -spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. Do not over vibrate. 5. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between -- transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. Sections less than 15 feet in length between transverse joints will not be permitted. Remove such sections if directed by the Architect. - B. Curbs and Gutters: Automatic machine may be used for curbs and gutter placement at Contractor's option, if acceptable to the Architect. If machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results which meet or exceed the minimums herein specified. Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to the required cross-section, lines, grades, finish and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as specified. 05140 - 2 CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS AND PAVING r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3 3.4 JOINTS, A. Generals Construct expansion, weakened -plane (contraction), and construction joints true -to -line with face perpendicular to surface of the concrete, unless otherwise shown. Construct transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise shown. C B. Weakened -Plane (Contraction) Joints, Provide weakened -plane (contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on the Drawings. Construct weakened -plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness as follows: C. Tooled Joints: Form weakened -plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing f edges with a jointer. D. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at the end of all pours r and at locations where placement operations are stopped for a period d of more than 1/2 hour, except where such pour terminates at expansion joints. 1. Construct joints as shown, or if not shown, use standard metal keyway section forms. E. 'Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, I walks and other fixed objects. 1. Expansion joints shall be at 20 feet o.c., unless otherwise shown. 2. Extend joint fillers full -width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2" or more than 1" below finished surface. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for the full width being placed, wherever possible. where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. Form top edge of filler to conform to top profile of concrete. 3. Protect the top edge of the joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after both sides of joint are placed. 3.5 CONCRETE FINISHING: A. Finishes: Unless indicated otherwise, items of concrete to be finished as follows: 1. All sidewalks, concrete aprons and porches shall have float finish, brushed as directed to provide non -slip finish. 2. Curbs, gutters and driveway approaches shall be finished with a stiff -bristled broom to provide non -slip finish. Provide sample for approval. B. The following finishing procedures shall be observed: 1. After striking -off and consolidating concrete, smooth the surface by screeding and floating. Do not use "jitterbugs". Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust the floating to compact the surface and produce a uniform mixture. 2. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10 foot straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous, smooth finish. 3. work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 1/2" radius, unless otherwise shown. Eliminate any tool marks on concrete surface. CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS AND PAVING 02514 - 3 r p t_ L NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-4 4. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared complete surface finishing as follows: a. Broom Finish: Broom finish, by drawing a fine broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to the Architect. b. On inclining slab surfaces, provide a coarse, non -slip finish by scoring surface with a stiff -bristled broom. 3.6 CURING: A. Protect and cure finished concrete walks, curbs and gutters and paving, complying with the applicable requirements of Section 03300, Concrete Work. Use moist -curing methods whenever possible for first 24 hours then apply curing compound. 3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS: _ A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with polysulphide-epoxy binder, or with golysulphide -- resin grout, complying with FS MMM-G-650B CANC. C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Sweep concrete pavement and walks free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other foreign material just prior to final inspection. END OF SECTION 02514 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. 05140 - 4 CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS AND PAVING r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 SECTION 03300 - CONCRETE WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Concrete Curbs, Walks and Paving - Section 02514 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 2. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for' Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". 3. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection". 4. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". 5. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". 6. MSP-1-90 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice". 7. Environmental Protection Agency - Guideline for Federal Procurement of Cement and Concrete Containing Fly Ash. B. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the Architect. C. Design and Testing: 1. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the Architect. A proven, established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used. Provide a minimum of 5 recent different compression test reports for the proposed mix. 2. Job site cylinders shall be taken when the Architect so directs. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory when test cylinders are to be taken. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete cylinders, and be responsible for their care and handling including breaking of same at laboratory. 3. The laboratory shall be an independent testing laboratory designated by the Architect and the Owner. 4. All expense for taking and testing concrete cylinders shall be borne by the Owner. 5. Test results shall be furnished to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor. 6. Any concrete not meeting strength requirements shall be further tested. If further tests indicate concrete will ultimately never meet strength requirements, the understrength concrete will be replaced with new as directed by Architect. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-2 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, and others as requested by the Architect. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS: A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metalframed plywood -faced or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed concrete without bow_or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or "good -as -new B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood" Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edgesealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS: A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. B. Supports for Reinforcement: 1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable. 2. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. C. Fibrous Concrete Reinforcement: 1. General: 100 percent virgin polypropylene fibrillated fibers specially manufactured for use as concrete reinforcement, containing no reprocessed olefin materials. Fibrous concrete reinforcement shall be as manufactured by Fibermesh Company, 4019 Industry Drive, Chattanooga, TN 37416, or approved equal. Use in all exterior concrete not otherwise detailed. 2. Physical Characteristics: a. Specific Gravity: 0.91 b. Tensile Strength: 70 to 110 ksi c. Fiber lengths: 1/2", 3/4", 1 1/2", 2" per manufacturer. 03300 - 2 CONCRETE WORK NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS: A. Portland Cement: 1. ASTM C 150, Type I, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless r otherwise acceptable to Architect B. Fine Aggregate: 1. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. 2. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows: 1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run ,gravel is not permitted. 3. Provide aggregate from'a single source for all exposed concrete. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: a. Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles or bars. b. These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the Architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids. D. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F. E. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable. F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions. H. Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows: 1. Type B, Retarding. 2. Type C, Accelerating. 3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding. 4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating. I. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by Architect. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS: A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1/20 thickness by depth of slab. B. Joint Sealing Compound: See Division 7 sections. C. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. D. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. r• 3. Polyethylene -coated burlap. a i CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 3 G. NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-4 E. Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless other type acceptable to the Architect. F. Concrete'Sealer: Acrylic co -polymer sealer equal to SealTite Tiah as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. The sealer shall not after -yellow or change the natural color of the concrete and shall provide a highly weatherproof, stain -resistant and dustproof sealer. 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES: A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C 94. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. B. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1. 1. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 192 and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C 39, specified in ACI 301. Establish a curve showing relationship between water -cement ratio (or cement content) and compressive strength, with at. least 3 points representing batches which produce strengths above and below that required. Use not less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days, or an earlier age when acceptable to the Architect, to establish each point on the curve. 2. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301. Strength data for establishing standard deviation will be considered suitable if the concrete production facility has certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in one group or the statistical average for 2 groups totaling 30 or more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions. 3. If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if no suitable records are available, select proportions to produce an average strength of at least 1200 psi greater than the required compressive strength of concrete. 4. After sufficient experience and test data become available from the job, using ACI 214 methods of evaluation, the standard deviation may be reduced when the probable frequency of an average of 3 consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100. C. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Architect. D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on the Drawings and schedules: 1. 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum (non -air -entrained), 0.46 maximum (air -entrained). 2. See Section 02514 for additional requirements for concrete mix design for sitework concrete. E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Architect before using in the work. 03300 - 4 CONCRETE WORK NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-5 2.6 ADMIXTURES: b A. Use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. I B. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. C. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the following limits: 1. 5.5% with 1 1/2" maximum aggregate 2. 6.0% with 1" maximum aggregate 3. 6.0% with 3/4" maximum aggregate r, E 4. 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate D. Use admixture for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. E. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. 2.7 SLUMP LIMITS: A. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3". 2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 3". 3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after addition of HRWR to verified 2"-3" slump concrete. 4. All Other Concrete: Not more than 4". 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING: A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, C and as herein specified. B. Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to the batch for material with insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted. C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required. D. When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMS: A. Design, erect, 'support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. F CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 5 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-6 B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Forms shall not leak cement paste. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets,, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snapoff metal form ties, designated to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. G. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is .at least 1 1/2" inside concrete. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. H. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. I. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCING: A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. 03300 - 6 CONCRETE WORK F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-7 r3.3 JOINTS: I A. Construction Joints: 1. Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the Drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect. 2. Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs and between walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. 3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. r Continue all reinforcement across construction joints. I B. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: 1. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. Form edge of pours with wood forms having keyway as detailed on the Drawings. If saw cut control joints are used, they shall be made with a power saw fitted with an abrasive or diamond blade. Saw cuts must be one-fourth the slab thickness. Sawing shall begin as soon as the concrete surface is firm enough so that it will not be torn or damaged by the blade. This will be within 4 to S hours after the concrete hardens. C. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column_ pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS: A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 3.5 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES: A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT: A. General: 1. Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-8 2. Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the time concrete is batched in amounts in accordance with approved submittals for this type of concrete. Mix batched concrete in strict accordance with the fibrous concrete reinforcement manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion. 3. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. 4. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix. D. Placing Concrete Slabs: 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. E. Cold Weather Placing: . 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with_ACI 306 and as herein specified. 2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F., uniformly heat all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of placement. 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 03300 - 8 CONCRETE WORK F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-9 4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. F. Hot Weather Placing: 1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with POW ACI 305 and as herein specified. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature i provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total E amount of mixing. 3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete. 4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix �. designs. 3.7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES: r A. Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed -to -view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas .n repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections 1 exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks. l B. Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed -to -view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is the as -cast concrete surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completelyremoved and smoothed. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown. 3.8 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES: A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic roofing, and as shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 1. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven floats or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 9 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-10 B. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed -to -view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thinfilm finish coating system. 2. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. C. Non -Slip Broom Finish: 1. Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps and ramps, and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 2. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the Architect before application. 3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION: A. General: 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. 2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after- placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 degrees F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous water -fog spray. b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent'absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows: a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial 03300 - 10 CONCRETE WORK NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-11 0 application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing damage during curing period. c. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by moist curing. 1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified, by methods specified above, as applicable. 2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. E. Applying Concrete Sealer: Apply on all concrete slab floors scheduled to be left exposed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Concrete shall 2. Concrete shall stains, grease, 3. Apply by spray coverage of 500 4. Do no apply if 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS: have cured for a least 7 days. be clean and dry prior to application, with oil etc. removed. brush, or lamb's wool applicator to approximate square feet per gallon. the temperature is less than 40 degrees F. A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28-days. Determine potential compressive strength of inplace concrete by testing field -cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. C. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. G i 3.11 RE -USE OF FORMS: A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 11 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-12 B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to Architect. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS: A. Filling -In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend .with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where indicated on the Drawings and as scheduled. Grout shall comply with ASTM C476. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS: A. Patching Defective Areas: 1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to Architect. 2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case to a depth of less than 111. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the area to be patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding agent. 3. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: 1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: 1. 2. 03300 - 12 Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections CONCRETE WORK NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-13 I regardless of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to Architects. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete. 6. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over l" in diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2 1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by Architect. E. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect. 3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION: A. The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform all other tests and to submit test reports. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by the Architect. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 2. Slump: One test for each set of compressive strength test specimens taken at point of discharge. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made. 5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. 6. Compressive strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 13 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-14 required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days. a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., the strength test may be waived by the Architect if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. c. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete. C. Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure► as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. END OF SECTION 03300 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. 03300 - 14 CONCRETE WORK NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 T SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3. Requirements for this section apply to masonry work specified in Division-4 section "Reinforced Unit Masonry". DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings and in schedule. Type of masonry work required include: 1. Brick masonry. 2. Concrete masonry unit. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces. B. Single -Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain G mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious �"- component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. F C. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of unit masonry, erect sample wall panels to further verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic + effects as well as qualities of materials and execution until approved by Architect. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work: r UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as standard for judging completed unit masonry construction. 1.4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. 1. Limit moisture absorption of concrete masonry units during delivery and until time of installation to the maximum percentage specified for Type I units for the average annual relative humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau Station nearest project site. C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in dry location. D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained. E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt: 1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, -- projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours building masonry walls or columns. C. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. D. Staining: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. -- 04200 - 2 UNIT MASONRY 4 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 E. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. F. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. G. Cold -Weather Construction: Do not perform masonry work when the weather conditions indicate that temperatures below 40 degrees F. will be encountered within 48 hours of the work. 1. Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen. 2. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch.' 3. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. BRICK MADE FROM CLAY OR SHALE: A. General: Comply with referenced standards and other requirements indicated below applicable to each form of brick required: B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216,Grade SW and as follows: 1. Face brick #A shall be BL 600 Oxford Brown Velour Modular by Acme Brick or approved equal. 2. Face brick #B shall be Perla #30 (BL 30) Velour Modular as manufactured by Acme Brick or approved equal. 2.2. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Comply with referenced standards and other requirements indicated below applicable to each form of E concrete masonry unit required. F 1. Provide special shapes where indicated and as follows: a. For lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 B. Concrete Block: Provide units complying with characteristics indicated below for grade, Type, face size, exposed face, and under each form of block indicated, for weight classification. " 1.- All concrete masonry units shall be ASTM C90, Grade N, light weight, with a minimum compressive strength of 1900 — psi on the net area (f'm = 1500 psi) at 28 days. 2. Size: Manufacturer's standard 2 cell units with nominal face dimensions of 1611 long x 8" high (15-5/8" x 7-5/811 actual) x thickness indicated. 3. Type I, moisture -controlled units. a. Cure units by autoclave treatment at a minimum temperature of 350 deg F. (176 deg. C.) and a minimum pressure of 125 psi. 4. Special inspection of construction procedures shall be provided by the contractor during construction. 2.3. MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold -weather construction. Provide natural color or — white cement as required to produce required mortar color. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. For colored pigmented mortars use premixed colored masonry cements of formulation required to produce color indicated, or if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. D . Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/,4 inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. E. Water: Clean and potable. 2.4. JOINT REINFORCEMENT, TIES AND ANCHORING DEVICES: A. Material: Comply with requirements indicated below for basic materials and with requirements indicated under each form of joint reinforcement, tie and anchor for size and other characteristics: B. Adjustable wall reinforcement system shall be equal to Hohmann & Barnard Truss Type #170 with rectangular wall ties and shall be located 16" vertically unless shown otherwise. 04200 - 4 UNIT MASONRY NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 7 ' C. Veneer wall ties shall be equal to Hohmann & Barnard DW-10 r„ Series and shall be located 16" vertically and horizontally unless shown otherwise. 1. For Anchorage to concrete framework, provide manufacturer's standard anchors with dovetail anchor section formed from 0.10461, (12 gauge) thick sheet metal and triangular -shaped wire tie section sized to extend within 1" of masonry face. 2. For anchorage to steel framework provide manufacturer's standard anchors with crimped 1/4" diameter wire anchor section for welding to steel and tri-angular shaped wire tie section sized to extend within 1" of masonry face. 3. Wire Size: 0.187511 diameter. 4. Wire Size: 0.25" diameter. 2.5. INSULATION A. Loose Granular Perlite Insulation: Expanded perlite complying with ASTM C 549, Type II (surface -treated for water repellency and limited moisture absorption) or IV (surface -treated for water repellency and to limit dust generation). R-value of 3.3 - 2.8 Btu/(hr x sf x deg. F.) for densities of 4.1 - 7.4 lbs. per cu. ft. at 75 deg. F (24 deg. C.). B. Loose Granular Vermiculite Insulation: Expanded vermiculite complying with ASTM C 516, Type II (surface -treated for water repellency and limited moisture absorption), Grade 3 (Fine), j� r-value of 2.3 Btu/ (hr x s.f. x deg. F) at 75 deg. F (24 deg d C.) . C. Rigid Insulation inserts: Expanded polystyrene inserts equal to Korfil Insulation or approved equal. D. Insulation shall be provided in all exterior walls separating an interior space from the exterior plus as indicated on the drawings. 2'.6. MASONRY CLEANERS A. Where existing masonry walls are to remain in interior spaces masonry surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter. B. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2-cup dry measure) and laundry detergent (1/2-cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 5 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 ti C. Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard -strength, general- purpose cleaner designed for new masonry surfaces of type indicated; composed of blended organic and inorganic acids combined with special wetting systems and inhibitors; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. -- 2.7. MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. 'General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious, water and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer; comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing times and water content. C. Mortar for.Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification for types of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement - lime. 2. Use Type M mortar for masonry below grade and in contact with earth, and where indicated. 3. Use Type S mortar for reinforced masonry and where indicated. 4. Use Type N mortar for exterior, above -grade loadbearing and nonloadbearing walls and parapet walls; for interior loadbearing walls; for interior nonloadbearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated. 2.8. DAMPPROOFING A. Acceptable Product: "Hydrocide 700 Mastic" manufactured by Sonneborn or approved equal. 2.9. LAMINATED COMPOSITION SHEET FLASHING A. Copper/Paper flashing: 3oz. copper sheet laminated between 2 sheets of bituminious impregnated Kraft paper or saturated fabric. 04200 - 6 UNIT MASONRY .•. I NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Wetting Clay Brick: Wet brick made from clay or shale which have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 grams per 20 sq. in. per minute. Use wetting methods which ensure each clay masonry unit being nearly saturated but surface dry when laid. B. Do not wet concrete masonry units. C. Cleaning Reinforcing: Before placing, remove loose rust, ice and other coatings from reinforcing. D. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. E. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses. F. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. G. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws to provide clean, r sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. 1. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units. 3.2. CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arrises do not exceed 1/4" in 101, or 3/8" in a story height not to exceed 201, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any story or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 401or more. For vertical alignment of head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4" in 1011, 1/2" maximum. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 B. Variations from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For top surface of bearing walls do not exceed 1/8" between adjacent floor elements in 10' or 1/16" within width of a single unit. 3.3. LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement -type joints, returps, and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than -half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. C. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern shown or, if not shown, lay in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in course above and below. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2- unit length for one-half running bond or 1/3-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly (if required), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. E. Built -In Work: As construction progresses, build -in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 inches) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and.similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 04200 - 8 UNIT MASONRY F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3.4.- MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay brick size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joint; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. B. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. D. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners or jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar. 3.5. STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY A. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners, unless otherwise shown. 1. For horizontally reinforced masonry, provide continuity at corners with prefabricated "L" units, in addition to masonry bonding. B. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and space as follows: 1. Provide individual metal ties. 2. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement using prefabricated "T" units. C. Intersecting Load -Bearing Walls: If Carried up separately, block or tooth vertical joint 8" maximum offsets and provide rigid steel anchors spaced not more than 4'-0" o.c. vertically or omit blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at no more than 2'-011 o.c. vertically. Form anchors of galvanized steel not less than 1-1/2" x 1/4" x 2'-0" long with ends turned up not less than 2" or with cross pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar -filled cores. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 9 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 D. Nonbearing Interior Partitions: Build full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless shown otherwise. 3.6. HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches.. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing unless specifically noted to be omitted. D. Reinforce the following walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcement 1. Single wythe walls. 2. Multi-wythe walls with one or more stack bond wythes. 3. Hollow concrete masonry walls. 4. Multi wythe masonry walls. E. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and 'IT" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7. ANCHORING MASONRY WORK A. General: Provide anchor devices of type indicated. B. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. 2 3. 04200 10 Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches o.c. horizontally. UNIT MASONRY 0 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3.8. CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry t: where indicated. Build in related items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in -plane restraint of wall or partition movement. B. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any. C. Build flanges of factory -fabricated expansion joint units into masonry. D. Build in non-metallic joint fillers where indicated. E. Build in horizontal pressure -relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by either leaving an air space or inserting p non-metallic compressible joint filler of width required to permit installation of sealant and backer rod. 3.9. LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1'-0" for brick size units and 2'-0" for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precast or formed -in -place masonry lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed -in -place lintels. 1. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcement bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.10. FLASHING.OF MASONRY WORK ` A. General: Provide concealed flashing in masonry work at or above, shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, so as to divert such water to the exterior. and where indicated. UNIT MASONRY 7 04200 - 11 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 B. Prepare masonry surfaces so that they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with mastic before covering with mortar. Extend flashing through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. C. Extend flashing the full length of lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each r- end. Extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches, and through the inner wythe to within 1/2 inches of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2 inches. At heads and sills, turn up ends not _ less than 2 inches to form a pan. D. Interlock end joints of deformed metal flashings by overlapping deformations not less than 1-1/2 inches and seal lap with elastic sealant. E. Install flashing to comply with manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above concealed flashings. Space 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. G. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work where shown or required to be built into masonry work. 3.11. INSTALLATION OF DAMPPROOFING A. Install materials only when ambient temperature exceeds 40 degrees Fahrenheit. B. Provide surfaces to receive dampproofing which are dry prior to application of materials. C. Provide surfaces to receive dampproofing which are clean, and free of voids, loose aggregate, fins or projections, or other deleterious materials. D. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions prior to application of dampproofing. E. Trowel dampproofing on designated surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations and as indicated on the drawings. 04200 - 12 UNIT MASONRY NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 F F. Repair damaged areas of dampproofing prior to covering by patching with materials as recommended by manufacturer. 3.12. REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: I. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by means of bucket and brush hand -cleaning method described in BIA "Technical Note No. 20 Revised" to clean brick masonry made from clay or shale, except use masonry cleaner indicated below: a. Detergent. b. Acidic cleaner: apply in compliance with directions of cleaner manufacturer. 6. Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with masonry manufacturer's directions and applicable NCMA "TEK" bulletins. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 13 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial -- Completion. END OF SECTION 04200 04200 - 14 UNIT MASONRY q NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 SECTION 04230 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of each type of reinforced unit masonry work is indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Requirements of Section 04200, Unit Masonry, apply to work of this 'section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcing bars. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. General: Refer to Section 04200, Unit Masonry, for masonry materials and accessories not included in this section. B. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades complying with ASTM A 615 and as follows: 1. Provide Grade 60. 2. Shop -fabricate reinforcing bars which are shown to be bent or hooked. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLACING REINFORCING: A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes. FIN B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing shown. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter -or 1" (whichever is greater). 1. C. For columns, piers and pilasters, provide a clear distance between vertical bars as shown, but not less than 1 1/2 times the nominal bar diameter or 1 1/20, whichever is greater. Provide lateral ties as shown. D. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable to the Architect. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise shown. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04230 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 E. Provide not less than minimum lap shown, or if not shown, as required by governing code. F. Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses, with a minimum mortar cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other locations. G. Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcing as the work progresses, with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap units not less than 6" at ends. Use prefabricated "L" and "T" units to provide continuity at corners and intersections. Cut and bend units as recommended by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. H. Anchoring: Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structures as indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Refer to Section 04200, Unit Masonry, for general installation requirements of unit masonry. B. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork. C. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. D. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has hardened sufficiently to carry its own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on it during construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY: A. General: 1. Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Lay CMU units with full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross -webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if not shown, provide 3/8" joints. 3. Where solid CMU units are shown, lay with full mortar head and bed joints B. walls: 1. 2. Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in 1/2 running bond with vertical joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock each course at corners and intersections. Use special -shaped units where shown, and as required for corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcing bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. 04230 - 2 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3 3. where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use 1 special units or modify units to allow for placement of continuous ( horizontal reinforcing bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over r, cores or cells of non -reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid bottoms. C. Columns, Piers and Pilasters: 1. Use CMU units of the size, shape and number of vertical core spaces shown. If not shown, use units which provide minimum clearances and grout coverage for number and size of vertical reinforcing bars shown. 2. Provide pattern bond shown, or if not shown, alternate head joints in vertical alignment. 3. Where bonded pilaster construction is shown, lay wall and pilaster units together to maximum pour height specified. A D. Grouting: 1. Use "Fine Grout" for filling spaces less than 4" in both horizontal directions. 2. Use "Coarse Grout" for filling 4" spaces or larger in both horizontal directions. E. Grouting Technique: Use low -lift grouting techniques subject to the requirements which follow. F. Low -Lift Grouting: 1. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in. in vertical cores to be grouted. 2. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 feet. 3. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5 feet height, or if bond beam occurs below 5 feet height, stop pour at course below bond beam. 4. Pour grout using container with spout or by chute. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1 1/2" below top course of pour. 5. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1 1/2" below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcing in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. G. Grout Placing: 1. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations. 2. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods are acceptable to the Architect. 3. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working t` day with not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 5 feet. Allow not less than 30 minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation. r 4. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill llI bond beam course to within 1" of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry. r REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04230 - 3 r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 5. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1 1/2" of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required. END OF SECTION 04230 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. 04230 - 4 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 F SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of structural steel work is shown on the Drawings, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel required. B. Structural steel is that work defined in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on the Drawings. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Reinforcing Steel - Section 03300 B. Steel Joists - Section 05210 C. Metal Decking - Section 05300 D. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications - Section 05500 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following except as otherwise indicated: 1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings." 2. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design", Ninth Edition, and including the "Commentary" and supplements thereto as issued. 3. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 4. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code". 5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use". B. Qualifications for Welding Work: 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months. 3. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the Contractor's responsibility. C. Source Quality Control: 1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in the mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and t.. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1 r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. 2. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply. D. Design of Members and Connections: 1. All details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at the site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. 2. Promptly notify the Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of the structure are not clearly indicated. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings, Structural Steel: -' 1. Submit shop drawings prepared under the supervision of a registered professional engineer including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members, and details, schedules, procedures and diagrams showing the sequence of erection. 2. Architect's review of shop drawings will be for general considerations only. Compliance with requirements for materials fabrication and erection of structural steel is the Contractor's "- responsibility. 3. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGS A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast -in -place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay that work. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. D. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or thesupporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36, except where other type steel is shown. B. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B, Fy = 46 ksi C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A 501 D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated. 05120 - 2 STRUCTURAL STEEL a- i NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3 E. Headed Stud Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold finished carbon steel; with dimensions complying with AISC Specifications. F. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low -carbon steel bolts and nuts. 1. Provide either hexagonal, or square, heads and nuts, except use tt^^ only hexagonal units for exposed connections. is G. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows: 1. Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A 325. H. Concrete Expansion Anchors: Sleeve type anchors meeting Federal Specification FF-S-325 INT AMD 3, Group II, Type 3, Class 3 or wedge type anchors meeting Federal Specification FF-S-325 INT'AMD 3, Group II, Type 4, Class 1. I. Chemical Anchors: Consisting of a threaded rod of zinc -plated AISI 1018 steel, a nut, washer, and sealed glass capsule containing a polyester resin and quartz sand aggregate filler. Rods 3/8 inch through 3/4 inch shall have a minimum yield stress of 60 KSI and tensile strength of 74 KSI. J. Renovation Anchors: Consisting of a threaded rod of zinc -plated AISI 1018 steel, a nut, washer and a galvanized wire mesh screen tube. The rtwo-part adhesive shall be contained in one tube of a plastic cartridge with a hardening agent in the other tube. The two components are to be mixed as they are dispensed. Rods 3/8 through 3/4 inch shall have a minimum yield stress of 60 ksi and a tensile strength of 74 ksi. K. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code.. L. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "Universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; complying with performance requirements for FS TT-P-645A. M. Non -Metallic Non -Shrink Grout: Pre -mixed, non-metallic, non -corrosive, non -staining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CE CRD-C 621. 6 , 1. Provide non-metallic, non -shrink grout as manufactured by one of *' the following: !' a. Masterflow 713; Master Builders. b. Upcon; Upco Chem. Div., USM Corp. c. Sealtite 588; W.R. Meadows, Inc. I�I 2.2 FABRICATION: i. A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members as shown. 2. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 , 3. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces on members exposed in the final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects: B. Connections: 1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. 2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. 3. Provide high -strength threaded fasteners for all principal bolted connections, except where unfinished bolts are shown. C. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only the bolted connections of secondary framing members to primary members (including purlins, girts and other framing members taking only nominal stress) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erection. D. High -Strength Bolted Construction: Install high -strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts". E. Welded Construction: 1. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without warp. F. Stud Connectors: 1. Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer of the -� stud connectors. Shop weld stud connectors, as shown, to bearing or embedded plates. Use automatic end welding of headed stud connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.. G. Holes for Other Works 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final shop drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. -, 2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. H. Splicing: 1. Splicing of beams shall be as shown on the Drawings. All other splicing shall be made only with the written consent of the - Architect and/or Engineer. When approved, copies of weld tests shall be furnished to the Architect and Engineer. 2.3 SHOP PAINTING: A. General: 1. Shop paint all structural steel work, except those members or - portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on the exposed portions and the initial 2" of embedded areas only. 2. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high -strength bolted with friction -type connections. 05120 - 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-5 3. Do not paint surfaces, which are scheduled to receive sprayed -on fireproofing. 4. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish r, it from the first. t B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and splatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel r Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: 1. SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or FOR 2. SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or 3. SP-7 "Brush-off Blast Cleaning". C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions r and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Use f painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and all exposed surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTIONs A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. t 3.2 ERECTION: A. General: Comply with the AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein specified. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete the work. D. Anchor Boltss Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in -place work. 1. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. 2. Refer to Division 3 of these specifications for anchor bolt ` installation requirements in concrete, and Division 4 for masonry installation. 1 E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: 1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 2. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. 3. Tighten the anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 4. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions, or as otherwise required. F. Field Assembly: 1. Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 2. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified RISC tolerances. 3. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on the mean operating temperature of the structure. Make allowances for the difference between temperature at time of erection and the mean temperature at which the structure will be when completed and in service. 4. Splice members only where shown or specified. G. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. H. Comply with RISC Specifications:_ For bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and the removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. -- I. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. J. Gas -Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as -- acceptable to the Architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. K. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, r- bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. L. Shear Connectors: All areas to which studs are to be attached must be free of all foreign material, such as rust, oil, grease, paint, etc. When the mill scale is sufficiently thick to cause difficulty in -- obtaining proper welds., it must be removed by grinding or blasting. M. Stud connectors shall be installed on all bearing or embedded plates. Number of shear connectors required is shown on the plans. Use -- automatic end welding of headed stud connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION 05120 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. 05120 - 6 STRUCTURAL STEEL _ e i NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1144-1 SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of steel joists is shown on the Drawings, including basic layout and type of joists required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Provide joists fabricated in compliance with the following, and as herein specified. 1. SJI "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables" for: a. K-Series Open Web Steel Joists b. RCS -Series Open Web Steel Joists B. Qualification of Welding works 1. Joint connections and splices of joist members shall be made by welding and shall comply with the SJI "Standard Specifications" and "Technical Digest #8 - Welding of Open Web Steel Joists". 2. Joists welded in place may be subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and replacing any portion of the steel joists for testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove and replace any work found to be defective and provide new acceptable work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Data, Steel Joists: 1. Joist manufacturer shall be a member of the Steel Joist Institute. 2. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of joist and its accessories. Include manufacturer's certification that joists comply with SJ1 "Standard Specifications". Indicate by transmittal form that a copy of each instruction has been r" distributed to the Erector. I B. Shop Drawings, Steel Joists: 1. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of joist units, special connections, jointing and accessories. Include the mark, number, type, location and spacing of joists and bridging. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver, store and handle steel joists as recommended in SJI "Standard Specifications". Handle and store joists in a manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid excessive stresses. B. Joists shall be delivered to the jobsite in an upright position and shall be unloaded with a two point sling on a winch line from a crane or winch truck. Allowing joists to fall from the bed of a truck will not be permitted. STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 C. Store joists in an upright position with blocking spaced not more than 15 feet on center. Brace joists in an upright position until hoisted onto structure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Steel: Comply with SJI "Standard Specifications" B. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular hexagon type, low carbon steel. C. Steel Prime Paint: Comply with SJI "Standard Specifications", except asphalt type paint not permitted. 2.2 FABRICATION: A. General: Fabricate steel joists in accordance with SJI "Standard Specifications". B. Bridging: 1. Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging for "open web" joists, - complying with SJI "Standard Specifications". 2. Provide bridging anchors for ends of all bridging lines terminated at walls or beams. C. End Anchorage: Provide end anchorages to secure joists to adjacent construction, complying with SJI "Standard Specifications", unless otherwise indicated. D. Shop Painting: 1. Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories before application of shop paint. 2. Apply one shop coat of steel joist primer paint to steel joists and accessories, by spray, dipping, or other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50 mil. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which steel joists are to be installed and notify. the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. 3.2 ERECTION: A. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI "Standard Specifications", final shop drawings, and as herein specified. B. Bearing Plates: — 1. Furnish bearing plates to be built into the masonry construction. a. Refer to Division 4 sections for installation of bearing plates set in masonry. 05210 - 2 STEEL JOISTS NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3 C. Placing Joists: 1. Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and secured. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing before permanently fastening. 2. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during construction. Hoisting cables shall not be released until one line of bolted diagonal bridging nearest midspan for spans of 40 ft. to 60 ft., two lines of bolted diagonal bridging nearest third points of the span for spans of over 60 ft. to 100 ft., and all bolted diagonal bridging lines for spans over 100 ft. are installed. 3. For "K-Series" joists where 4 or 5 rows of bridging are required the row of bridging nearest the midspan of the joist shall be diagonal bridging. r' D. Bridging: t ` 1. Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before any construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at r top and bottom chords where terminated at walls or beams. E. Fastening Joists: 1. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI "Standard specifications_" for the type of joists used. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with the placing of joists. 2. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI "Standard Specifications" for the type of joists used. 3. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for bolted connections, unless otherwise indicated. F. Touch -Up Painting: 1. After joist installation, paint all field bolt heads and nuts, and welded areas, abraded or rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before painting. Use the same type of paint as used for shop painting. END OF SECTION 05210 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 3 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 L, SECTION 05300 - METAL ROOF DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of metal roof decking is shown on the Drawings, including basic layout and type of deck units required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise shown or specified: 1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members 2. AWS "Structural Welding Code". 3. SDI "Steel Roof Deck Design Manual". B. Qualification of welding Work: 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 2. Decking welded in place is subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and replacing any portion of decking for testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove work found to be defective and provide new acceptable work. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Compute the properties of metal roof deck sections on the basis of the effective design width as limited by the provisions of the AISI Specifications. Provide not less than the deck section properties shown, including section modulus and moment of inertia per foot of width. 2. Allowable Deflection: Design and fabricate deck for a maximum deflection of 1/240 of the clear span under the total uniform dead and live load. 3. Uplift Loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading of 45 lbs. per sq. ft. at eave overhang and 30 lbs. i per sq. ft. for other roof areas. F- 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Data: 1. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each product specified. include manufacturer's certification as may be required to show compliance with :these specifications. Indicate by transmittal form that a copy of each instruction has been distributed to the Installer. B. Shop Drawings: i 1. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of deck panels, anchorage 4 details and every condition requiring closure panels, supplementary framing, special jointing or other accessories. METAL ROOF DECKING 05300 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Steel for Painted Finish: B. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 611, Grade C. ASTM A 36. C. Paint for Non -Galvanized Deck: Deck unit manufacturer's baked -on, rust -inhibitive paint, for application to metal surfaces which have been chemically cleaned and phosphate chemical treated. 2.2 FABRICATION: A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span 3 or more supports with flush, telescoped or nested 2" end laps and nesting side laps, unless otherwise indicated. Provide deck configurations complying with SDI "Basic Design Specifications", and as specified herein. B. Wide -Rib Deck: Depth approximately 1 1/2"; ribs spaced approximately 6" o.c.; width of rib opening at roof surface not more than 2 1/2"; width of bottom rib surface not less that 1 3/4". C. Roof Sump Pans: 1. Fabricate from a single piece_of not less than 14 gauge galvanized sheet steel of the same quality as the deck units; with level bottoms and sloping sides to direct water flow to the drain, unless otherwise shown. Provide sump pans of adequate size to receive roof drains and with bearing flanges not less than 3" wide. Recess pans not less than 1 1/2" below the roof deck surface, unless otherwise shown or required by deck configuration. Holes for drains will be cut in the field. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1.INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which metal roof decking items are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install roof deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and final shop drawings, and as specified herein. Suspended ceilings, light fixtures, ducts, or other utilities shall not be supported by the steel deck. B. Placing Roof Deck Units: 1. Place roof deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends bearing on supporting members and accurately aligned end to end before being permanently fastened. Lap ends not less than 2". Do not stretch or contract the sidelap interlocks. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive deflection. . 2. Do not place deck units on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured properly and is dry. 3. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. 4. Do not use deck units for storage or working platform until permanently secured. 05300 - 2 METAL ROOF DECKING r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3 r C. Fastening Deck Units: 1. Permanently fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members as detailed on the drawings. 2. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal -arc welding, the appearance and quality of welds, and the methods used in correcting welding work. D. Cutting and Fittings 1. Cut and fit roof deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the roof decking, as shown on the Drawings. Provide neat, square and trim cuts. E. Reinforcement at Openings: 1. Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as r" required for strength, continuity of decking and support of other work, unless otherwise shown. 2. Reinforce roof decking around openings less than 15" in any dimension by means of a flat steel sheet placed over the opening and fusion welded to the top surface of the deck. Provide steel 0 sheet of the same quality as the deck units, not less than 20 gauge, and at least 12" wider and longer than the opening. Provide welds at each corner and spaced not more than 12" o.c. along each side. F. Roof Sump Pans: E1. Place roof sump pans over openings provided in the roof decking and weld to the top decking surface. Space welds not more than 12" o.c. with at least one weld at each corner. Cut opening in the bottom of the roof sump to accommodate the drain size indicated. 3.3 TOUCH-UP PAINTINGS A. After roof decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots on the top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. B. Touch-up shop painted surfaces with the same paint used in the shop, as recommended by the deck manufacturer. END OF SECTION 05300 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. METAL ROOF DECKING 05300 - 3 f NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 r SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUMMARY: A. Types of work in this section include rough carpentry for: t' 1. Wood f raming . C 2. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking. 3. Wood furring r� B. Finish carpentry is specified in another section within Division 6. 1.3. DEFINITIONS: A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. 1.4. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for materials listed. B. Material Certificates: Where dimensional lumber is provided to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses, submit listing of species and grade selected for each use, and submit evidence of compliance with specified requirements. Compliance may be in form of a signed copy of applicable portion of lumber producer's grading rules showing design values for selected species and grade. Design values shall be as approved by the Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee. C. Wood Treatment Data: Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installation and finishing of treated material. ROUGH CARPENTRY A 06100 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1. Preservative Treatment: For each type specified, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net — amount of preservative retained and conformance with applicable standards. 2. For water -borne treatment include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to.shipment to project site. 3. Fire -Retardant, Treatment: Include certification by treating plant that treated material complies with specified standard and other requirements. 1.5. PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. 1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. LUMBER, GENERAL: A. Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSO) Board of Review. B. Grade Stamps: Factory -mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing,.and mill. 06100 - 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY 71 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 r2.2. MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER: A. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown, and as follows: B. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. C. Grade: Standard Grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size lumber as required. No. 3 Common or Standard grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or No. 3 boards per SPIB rules. 2.3. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended nails. 1. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot -dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153). B. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I; asphalt saturated felt, non -perforated, 15-lb. type. 2.4. WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS: A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "Trt-Wd" or "Treated", or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements. 1. Pressure -treat above -ground items with water -borne preservatives to comply with AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following: ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing. b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. c. Wood framing members less than 18" above grade. d. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2. Pressure -treat the following with water -borne preservatives for ground contact use complying with AWPB LP-22: a. Wood members in contact with ground. b. Wood members in contact with fresh water. 3. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces B. Fire -Retardant Treatment: Where fire -retardant treated wood ("FRTW") is indicated, pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fire -retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27, respectively, for treatment type indicated below; identify "FRTW" lumber with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members Plumb and true and cut and fitted. C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. D. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 06100 - 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY i� NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 P E. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without :. splitting of wood; predrill as required. 3.2. WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS: A. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key -bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2" wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3. WOOD FURRING: A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required tolerance of finished work. 1. Firestop furred spaces on walls at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story, with wood blocking or noncombustible materials, accurately fitted to close furred spaces. B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Drywall: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1" x 2" furring at 16" o.c., vertically. C. Furring to Receive Plaster Lath: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1" x 2" furring at 16" o.c., vertically. D. Suspended Furring: Provide size and spacing shown, including hangers and attachment devices. Level to a tolerance of 1/8" in 101, except 1/4" in 10, for thick -coat plaster work. ROUGH CARPENTRY r 06100 - 5 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3.4. WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL: A. Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and r frame openings as shown, or if not shown, comply with recommendations of "Manual for House Framing" of National Forest Products Association (N.F.P.A). Do not splice _ structural members between supports. B. Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of "Manual for House Framing" and "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" published by N.F.P.A. END OF SECTION 06100 _ 06100 - 6 ROUGH CARPENTRY r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 r SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 4 , PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, .apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood cabinets (casework). 2. Laminate clad cabinets (plastic -covered casework). 3. Cabinet tops (countertops). 4. Cabinet Hardware. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements..._ that relate to this section: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work that is not exposed to view. 2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A., General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division l Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product and process specified in this section and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation. C. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. D. Samples for initial selection purposes of the following in form of manufacturer s color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. 1. Plastic laminate. NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work. B. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) except as otherwise indicated. 1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, - store only in areaswhose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions." 1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork Manufacturer's and Installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of installation through remainder of construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 06402 - 2 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK n j NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS r 2.1. HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high pressure decorative laminates which may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: (r 1. Formica Corp. 2. Micarta Div., Westinghouse Electric Corp. 3. Nevamar Corp. am 4. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. 2.2. MATERIALS t: A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI woodworking standard for each type of woodwork and f' quality grade indicated and, where the following products are r part of woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards, that apply to product characteristics indicated: 1. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4 2. High Pressure Laminate: NEMA LD 3. 3. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2. 4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 S. Softwood Plywood: PS 1. 2.3. FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. When drawer units andor fixed panels are located over cabinet doors on casework for transparent finishes, the direction of the grain shall run vertically on both exposed surfaces. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid wood (lumber) members less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/8 inch. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. I Disassemble components only as -- necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. r E. Factory -cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant coating. 2.4. ARCHITECTURAL CABINET TOPS (COUNTERTOPS) A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 4000. B. Type of Top: High pressure decorative laminate complying with the following: -- 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surface: High pressure decorative laminate as follows: a. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1) Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors and finishes in the following categories: a) Solid colors. b) Wood grains. c) Patterns. b. Grade: GP-50 (0.050-inch nominal thickness). 3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 2.5. WOOD CABINETS (CASEWORK) FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400A "Wood Cabinets." 06402 - 4 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK B NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 t� t ' B. Grade: Custom. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal Overlay. 1. Reveal Dimension: - 3/4 inch. D. Wood Species for Exposed Surfaces: Red Oak, plain sawn. E. Wood Species for Semiexposed Surfaces: Match species and cut indicated for exposed surfaces. 2.6. INTERIOR MISCELLANEOUS ORNAMENTAL ITEMS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 700. B. Grade: Custom. C. Lumber Species: Any closed -grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard. 2.7. FASTENERS AND ANCHORS A. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable requirements. 1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer. B. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK r- 06402 - 5 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 2.8. ROUND ORNAMENTAL COLUMNS A. Round ornamental columns shall be 12 inches in diameter (top and bottom), fabricated from treated select, kiln -dried Ponderosa Pine finger -jointed staves, utilizing water -proof — glue in lengths as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built. C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop - fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.2. INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this section for -' type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including tops) and with no variations in flushness of _ adjoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and, refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation., Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E . Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems -� as indicated. 06402 - 6 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 r� n F. Complete the finishing work specified in this section to whatever extent not completed at shop or before installation r- of woodwork. G. Refer to the Division 9 sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.3. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.4. PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensures that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.5. CABINET HARDWARE A. Cabinet Hardware as follows: 1. Pulls: Stanley #4484 US10 (2 pulls on drawers over 30 inches wide) . 2. Door Hinges: Grass #1200 with #1000 backplate. 3. Drawer Guides: K&V #1429 full extension slides. 4. Adjustable Cabinet Shelves: K&V #256 2C Steel shelf supports and #255 ZC polaster shelf standards. END OF SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK F 06402 - 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRAY 1194-1 SECTION 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Asphalt/glass-fiber felt roof membrane with aggregate surface. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Roof Decking" 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and wood cants. 3. Division 7 Section "Roof Specialties & Accessories" 4. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for metal counter flashings and building insulation. 5. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Fixtures" for roof drains. 1.3. DEFINITIONS A. Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal resistivity properties of insulating materials are designated by "R-values," they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-value). B. Thermal Resistance: Where thermal resistance properties of insulating materials are designated by "R-values," they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductance (C-value). 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data, including manufacturer s technical product data, installation instructions, and recommendations for each type of roofing product required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511-1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer ("Roofer") to perform built-up asphalt roofing work who has specialized in the installation of built-up asphalt roofing systems similar to that required for this project and who is acceptable to by manufacturer of primary roofing materials. 1. Installer Certification: Obtain written certification from manufacturer of built-up roofing system certifying that Installer is approved by manufacturer for installation of specified roofing system. Provide copy of certification to Architect prior to award of roofing work. 2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman who is on jobsite during times that built-up asphalt roofing work is in progress and who is experienced in installation of roofing systems similar to type and scope required for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain primary products, including each type of roofing sheet (felt), bitumen, composition flashings, and vapor retarder (if any), from a -- single manufacturer. Provide secondary products as recommended by manufacturer of primary products for use with roofing system specified. C. Insurance Certification: Assist Owner in preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as may be necessary in connection with fire and extended coverage insurance on roofing and associated work. D. UL Listing: Provide built-up roofing system and component materials that have been tested for application and slopes indicated and are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for Class A external fire exposure. E. Preliminary Roofing Conference:. As soon as possible after award of built-up roofing work, meet with Installer (Roofer), installers of substrate construction (decks) and other work adjoining roof system including penetrating work and rooftop units, Architect, Owner, and representatives of other entities directly concerned with performance of roofing system including (as applicable) Owner s insurers and test agencies. 1. Review requirements (Contract Documents), submittals, status of coordinating work, availability of materials, and installation facilities and establish preliminary installation schedule. Review requirements for inspections, testing, certifications, forecasted weather conditions, governing regulations, insurance requirements, and proposed installation procedures. 07511-2 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRAY 1194-1 F. Preapplication Roofing Conference: Approximately two weeks FIN prior to scheduled commencement of -built-up roofing installation and associated work, meet at project site with Installer, installer of each component of associated work, r- installers of deck or substrate construction to receive roofing work, installers of rooftop units and other work in and around roofing that must precede or follow roofing work (including mechanical work if any), Architect, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of the work, including (where applicable) Owner's insurers, test r agencies, and governing authorities. i 1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to �., roofing work, including but not necessarily limited to the following: a. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks), inspect and discuss condition of substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. E 1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements. 1.7. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle roofing materials in a manner that will ensure that there is no possibility of significant moisture pickup. Store in a dry, well -ventilated, weather -tight place. Unless protected from weather or other moisture sources, do not leave unused felts on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on end on pallets or other raised surface. Handle and store materials or equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent deflection of deck. 1.8. WARRANTIES A. Special Project Warranty: Submit 2 executed copies of standard 10-year "Roofing Guarantee" on form included at end of this section, covering work of this section including roofing membrane, composition flashing, roof insulation, vapor retarders (if any), and roofing accessories, signed and countersigned by Installer (Roofer) and Contractor. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511-3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. BUILT-UP ROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEM A. Insulated -Deck Asphalt/Glass-Fiber/Aggregate Roofing (IAGA- BUR): Provide built-up aggregate -surfaced roof system with asphalt bitumen, vented base sheet, and 3 plies glass -fiber felts for lay-up as follows: 1. Base Sheet: Single ply of asphalt -coated heavy -weight glass fiber felt. 2. Base Sheet: Single ply of asphalt -coated heavy -weight glass -fiber base sheet. 3. Ply Felts: 3 plies of asphalt -impregnated glass -fiber felts, complying with ASTM D 2178, Type III or Type IV. 4. Bitumen: Roofing asphalt, complying with ASTM D 312, Type III. 5. Comply with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Specification Plate 42 - IAGA, Diagram A. 6. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, built-up asphalt roofing system systems that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not ... limited to, the following: a. Celotex Corp.; Specification G.A.-3-4-C-G. b. GAF Corp.; Specification 105-G. c. Genstar Roofing Products Co.; Specification AAA-3-2. d. Manville Building Materials Corp.; Specification 4GIG. e. Owens -Coming Fiberglas Corp.; Specification 43-IG. f. Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc.; Specification 503. 2.2. SHEET METAL ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Refer to Section 07600, "FLASHING AND SHEET METAL." B. Zinc -Coated Steel: ASTM A 526/A 526M, with 0.20 percent copper, G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; 0.0359 inches thick (22 gage), except as otherwise indicated. C. Solder for Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated or recommended by metal manufacturer, provide 50/50 tin/lead type (ASTM B 32) for tinning and soldering joints; use rosin flux. 2.3. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Surfacing Aggregate: Clean, water -worn opaque gravel complying with ASTM D 1863. 1. Where ASTM D 1863 aggregate is not available, provide aggregate complying with gradation sizes 6, 7, and 67 of ASTM D 448, provided that moisture content by weight is 07511-4 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRAY 1194-1 3 percent or less and aggregate meets other requirements of ASTM D 1863. B. Wood Members, Units: Comply with requirements of "Carpentry" sections of these specifications for nailers, walkway units, and other wood members indicated as roofing system work. Provide wood pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for above -ground use (AWPB LP-2). C. Walkway Protection Boards: Mineral -surfaced bituminous composition boards, approximately 1/2 inch thick, manufactured specifically for hot bituminous application on built-up roofing as a protection course for foot traffic. D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Carey -Tread; Celotex Corp. 2. J-Walk; Manville Building Materials Corp. 3. Roofwalk; J & P Petroleum Products, Inc. 4. White Walk;-W. R. Meadows, Inc. E. Substrate Joint Tape: 6-inch or 8-inch-wide coated glass - fiber joint tape. F. Mastic Sealant: Polysiobutylene (plain or bituminous modified), nonhardening, nonmigrating, nonskinning, and nondrying. G. Asphaltic Primer: Comply with ASTM D 41. H. Fasteners: Provide industry -standard types of mechanical fasteners for built-up asphalt roofing system work, tested by manufacturer for required pull-out strength where applicable and compatible with deck type and roofing products used. Provide either 1-inch-diameter nail heads or 1-3/8-inch- diameter by 30-gage sheet metal caps for nails used to secure base sheets, felts, or insulation boards of roofing system. 2.4. FABRICATION OF SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES A. SMACNA and NRCA Details:, Conform work with details shown and with applicable fabrication requirements of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA. Comply with installation details of "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" by NRCA. B. Prefabricate units as indicated or provide standard manufactured units complying with requirements; fabricate from sheet metal indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, from lead -coated copper. r BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING i' 07511-5 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 C. Provide 4-inch-wide flanges for setting on built-up asphalt roofing system membrane with concealment by composition stripping. D. Fabricate work with flat -lock soldered joints and seams; except where joint movement is necessary, provide 1-inch-deep interlocking hooked flanges filled with mastic sealant. — E. Fabricate penetration sleeves with minimum 8-inch-high stack, of diameter 1 inch larger than penetrating element. _ Counterflashing is specified as work of another section of these specifications. 2.5. ROOF INSULATION: Insulation .under Built-up roofing at new addition shall have an "R" value rating of not less then R- 19. A. Urethane Board Roof Insulation: Rigid, closed -cell, polyurethane boards of thicknesses indicated, ,with aged k- value of 0.17, (aged at 50 percent R.H. and 73 deg F (23 deg C) for 180 days) , 1.5-pounds per cu. ft. minimum density, with integrally bonded asphalt -impregnated felt covering on both faces. Provide in manufacturers standard sizes. -- 1. Composite Type: In lieu of bottom.felt cover, provide 3/4-inch-thick, integrally bonded course of rigid, perlite- or mineral -fiber insulation board to form composite board with urethane insulation. B. Polyisocyanurate Foam Board Insulation: Rigid boards of minimum 2.0 lb./cu. ft. density polyisocyanurate based foam core, permanently bonded to roofing felt facer sheets. .Provide in thickness indicated, with minimum aged K-value of 0.17 (when conditioned per RIC/TIMA Bulletin NO. 281-1). 1. Composite Type: Provide composite _type equal to Celotex Hy -Therm COMPOSITE roof insulation. C. Perlite Board Insulation: Rigid boards of perlite in a minimum thickness of 1-1/2 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1. INSPECTION OF SUBSTRATE A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive built-up roofing system and associated work and conditions under which roofing will be installed. Do not r proceed with roofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner — acceptable to Installer. 07511-6 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRAY 1194-1 3.2. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS r t t A. Install membrane materials in accordance with manufacturer's current published application instructions as described in the w- Owens -Comings DERBIGUM APP Torch -On Modified Bitumen Products Referenced and Application Guide. r- B. Protect other work from spillage of built-up roofing materials, and prevent liquid materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace/restore other work damaged by installation of built-up roofing system work. r C. Insurance/Code Compliance: Install built-up roofing system r- for (and test where required to show) compliance with governing regulations and with the following insurance requirements: 1. Factory Mutual requirements for "Class I" or "Noncombustible," including zoned wind resistance as specified by FM. 2. Underwriters Laboratories "Fire Classified" and "Class 60" wind uplift resistance. D. Coordinate the installation of roofing sheets, flashings, stripping, coatings, and surfacings so that insulation and felts are not exposed to precipitation or exposed overnight. Provide cut offs at end of each day's work, to cover exposed felts with a course of coated felt with joints and edges sealed with roofing cement. Remove cut offs immediately before resuming work. Glaze -coat installed ply -sheet courses at end of each day's work where final surfacing has not been installed. E. Asphalt Bitumen Heating: Heat and apply bitumen in accordance with equiviscous temperature method ("EVT Method") as recommended by NRCA. Do not raise temperature above minimum normal fluid -holding temperature necessary to attain EVT (plus 5 deg F or 14 deg C, at point of application) more than one hour prior to time of application. Discard bitumen that has been held at temperature, exceeding finished blowing temperature (FBT) for a period exceeding 3 hours. Determine flash point, finished blowing temperature and EVT or bitumen, either by information from bitumen producer or by suitable tests, and determine maximum fire -safe handling temperature and do not exceed that temperature in heating bitumen; but in no case heat bitumen to a temperature higher than 25 deg F (14 deg C) below flash point. For aggregate -surfaced pour coats of bitumen, limit application temperature to minimum required for proper embedment of aggregate and maximum that will permit retention of a coating of weight required (depends on slope of surface). Keep kettle lid closed except when adding bitumen. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING l l 07511-7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 F. Bitumen Mopping Weights: For interply mopping, and for other moppings except as otherwise indicated, apply bitumen at the rate of 25 pounds of asphalt (plus or minus,25 percent on a total -job average basis) per roof square (100 sq. ft.) between plies. G. Substrate Joint Penetrations: Do not allow bitumen to penetrate substrate joints and enter building or damage insulation, vapor barriers (retarders), or other construction. Where mopping is applied directly to a substrate, tape joints or, in the case of steep asphalt, hold mopping back 2 inches from both sides of each joint. H. Cutoffs: At end of each day's roofing installation, protect exposed edge of incomplete work, including ply sheets and insulation. Provide temporary covering of 2 plies of No. 15 _ roofing felt set in full moppings of hot bitumen; remove at beginning of next day's work. Glaze -coat areas of completed organic ply sheets which cannot be flood -coated and aggregate - surfaced before end of each day's work. 3.3. INSTALLATION OF INSULATION A. General: Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for the handling, installation, and bonding or anchorage of insulation to substrate. _ B. Prime surface of deck as/or if recommended by the manufacturer with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 gallon of primer per 100 sq. ft. and allow primer.to dry. — C. Secure insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for attachment of specified board type insulation to deck type shown. Fasten insulation over entire area of roofing at spacing as required by FM for Windstorm Resistance Classification 1-60. Run long joints for insulation.in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to _ ,roof slope with end joints staggered between rows. D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so -- completed surface is flush with ring of drain. 3.4. ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Shingling of Plies: Except as otherwise indicated, install membrane with ply sheets shingled uniformly to achieve required number of thickness of membrane throughout. Shingle in proper direction to shed water on each large area of roofing, where slope is significant (over 1/2 inch). B. Cant Strips/Tapered Edge Strips: Except as otherwise shown, install preformed 45-deg insulation cant strips at junctures 07511-8 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING P NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRAY 1194-1 of built-up asphalt roofing system membrane with vertical surface. Provide preformed, tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces. C. Base Sheet: Install one lapped course of base sheet. Nail to nailable substrates and elsewhere as indicated. Mop to non- nailable substrate with steep asphalt, except use special adhesive where indicated. D. Interply Sheets: Install the number and type(s) of ply sheets (felts) indicated, lapped (shingled) amount specified to form a continuous, uniform membrane with continuous bitumen moppings between sheets so that ply sheet does not touch ply sheet. As ply -sheet membrane is laid up, glaze -coat top surface with 10-lb./sq. ft. mopping of same bitumen. I. Mop base of membrane to base sheet, or directly to substrate if no base sheet used. 2. Extend built-up roofing membrane to 2 inches (nominal) above top edge of cant strip and terminate. 3. Provide a folded -back envelope at edges and penetrations r^ of built-up roofing membrane where it is not turned up on a tapered strip, to provide positive protection against ._ flow of bitumen into building or off the edge. Extend base sheet to form envelope or, where no base sheet is provided, install one ply of coated felt, set in steep asphalt with joints sealed. Seal corners and other interruptions of envelope with large beads of roofing cement to provide positive protection against flow of i bitumen. 4. Nail edges of roofing membrane to wood blocking at perimeter edges of roof prior to installing metal gravel E stops/fascias. Space nails at minimum 8 inches o.c. E. Set -On Accessories: Where small roof accessories are set on "^ built-up roofing membrane, set metal flanges in a bed of p: roofing cement and seal penetration of membrane with bead of roofing cement to prevent flow of bitumen from membrane. 3.5. COMPOSITION FLASHING AND STRIPPING r A. Install composition flashing at cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof. Install one ply of No. 15 asphalt -impregnated glass fabric and one ply of glass -fiber -reinforced flashing, each set in a continuous coating of roofing cement and extended onto deck 6 inches and 4 inches," respectively. Nail or provide other forms of mechanical anchorage of composition flashing to vertical surfaces, as recommended by manufacturer of primary roofing materials. Except where concealed by elastic flashing, apply a heavy coating of roofing cement over E composition flashing. E a BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511-9 F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 B. Install composition stripping where metal flanges are set on roofing. Provide not less than one ply of glass -fiber fabric and one ply of reinforced glass -fiber flashing; set each in a continuous coating of roofing cement and extended onto the deck 6 inches and 4 inches, respectively. Except where concealed by aggregate surfacing or elastic flashing, apply a heavy coating of roofing cement over composition stripping. C. Roof Drains: Fill clamping ring base with a heavy coating of roofing cement. Set lead flashing sheet in a bed of roofing cement on completed built-up roofing ply sheet courses, with lead sheet clamped in roof drain ring and extended 12 inches onto roofing. Cover lead sheet with composition stripping, with plies extended 4 inches to 6 inches beyond edges of lead sheet. Provide composition stripping of gravel stop rings (if any) . D. Allow for expansion of running metal flashing and edge trim which adjoins roofing. Do not seal, or bond membrane or composition flashing and stripping to metal flanges over 3 feet in length. E. Counter-flashings: Counter-flashings, cap flashings, expansion joints, and similar work to be coordinated with built-up roofing work are specified in other sections of these specifications. F. Roof Accessories: Miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items, including insulation vents and other devices, and major items of roof accessories (if,any) to be coordinated with built-up roofing system work, are specified in other sections of these specifications. G. Aggregate Surfacing: Promptly after completion of built-up roof membrane, edge treatment and set -on accessories in each substantial area of roofing, flood -coat surface as indicated and, while each small area is hot and fluid, cast the following approximate weight of aggregate in a uniform course. 1. Flood Coat: 60 pounds per square of . Type I or Type II asphalt, except provide steep asphalt where slope exceeds 3/4 inch per foot. 2. Aggregate: Gravel, averaging 500 pounds per square. 3. Do not install flood coating of bitumen and aggregate surface source .at edges of roofing until composition flashing and stripping work has been completed. Glaze - coat organic ply sheet courses where surfacing cannot be installed on the same day. Delay aggregate surfacing only as long as necessary to substantially complete edge work and tests (if any). 07511-10 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING _ NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRAY 1194-1 3.6. ROOF WALKWAYS A. Membrane Reinforcement: Prior to application of aggregate surfacing on roof membrane, and in pattern shown for walkways, and extended 6 inches beyond either side of walkways, install one additional ply of glass -fiber felt in set in mopping of hot bitumen. r- f B. Composition Board -Type Walkways: Provide walkway protection boards at locations shown, using units of size shown or, if size not shown, using units of manufacturers standard size, r' 1/2 inch thick. Set units in additional pour coat of hot bitumen after aggregate surfacing of built-up roof membrane. 3.7. PROTECTION OF ROOFING «� A. Upon completion of roofing (including associated work), 4 institute appropriate procedures for surveillance and protection of roofing during remainder of construction period. At end of construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will in no way affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing and prepare -a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner, describing nature and extent of r. deterioration or damage found. B. Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found at time of above inspection to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and in accordance with requirements of specified warranty. END OF SECTION 07511 BUILT—UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511-11 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 i r SECTION 07512 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING i PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. r' t' 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Modified Bitumen roof membrane with mineral surface cap sheet. B. This Section also includes the following roofing related 1 a• : work r 1. Roof Insulation c. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain r, requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Roof Decking" 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and wood cants. 3. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for metal counter flashings. 4. Division 7 Section "Roof Specialties & Accessories" S. Division 15: For roof drains. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data, including manufacturers technical product data, installation instructions, and recommendations for each type of roofing product required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer ("Roofer") to perform roofing work who has specialized in the installation of roofing systems similar to that required MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING 07512 - 1 r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 for this project and who is acceptable to by manufacturer of primary roofing materials. 1. Installer Certification: Obtain written certification from manufacturer of roofing system certifying that Installer is approved by manufacturer for installation of specified roofing system. Provide copy of - certification to Architect prior to award of roofing work. 2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to _ maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman who is on jobsite during times that roofing work is in progress and who is experienced in installation of roofing systems similar to type and scope required for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain primary products, including each type of roofing sheet (felt), bitumen, composition flashings, and vapor retarder (if any), from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary products as recommended by manufacturer of primary products for use with roofing system specified. C. Insurance Certification: Assist Owner in preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as may be necessary in connection with fire and extended coverage insurance on roofing and associated work. D. UL Listing: Provide built-up roofing system and component materials that have been tested for application and slopes indicated and are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for Class A external fire exposure. E. Preliminary Roofing Conference: As soon as possible after .- award of built-up roofing work, meet with Installer (Roofer), installers of substrate construction (decks) and other work adjoining roof system including penetrating work and rooftop units, Architect, Owner, and representatives of other entities directly concerned with performance of roofing system including (as applicable) Owner's insurers and test agencies. -- 1. Review requirements (Contract Documents), submittals, status of coordinating work, availability of materials, and installation facilities and establish preliminary installation schedule. Review requirements for inspections, testing, certifications, forecasted weather conditions, governing regulations, insurance requirements, and proposed installation procedures. F. Preapplication Roofing Conference: Approximately two weeks prior to scheduled commencement of built-up roofing 07512 - 2 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING i NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 installation and associated work, meet at project site with Installer, installer of each component of associated work, installers of deck or substrate construction to receive ►' roofing work, installers of rooftop units and other work in and around roofing that must precede or follow roofing work (including mechanical work if any), Architect, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of the work, including (where applicable) Owner's insurers, test agencies, and governing authorities. 1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work, including but not necessarily limited to the following:' a. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks), inspect and discuss condition of substrate, d roof drains, curbs, penetrations, and other l preparatory work performed by other trades. 1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements. 1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle roofing materials in a manner that will ensure that there is no possibility of significant moisture pickup. Store in a dry, well -ventilated, weather -tight place. Unless protected from weather or other moisture sources, do not leave unused felts on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on end on pallets or other raised surface. Handle and store materials or equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent deflection of deck. i 1.7. WARRANTIES r• A. Special Project Warranty: Submit 2 executed copies of standard 10-year "Roofing Guarantee" on form approved by Architect, covering work of this section including roofing membrane, flashing, roof insulation, vapor retarders (if C any), and roofing accessories, signed and countersigned by Installer (Roofer) and Contractor. MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING 07512 - 3 r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. ROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEM: The roofing system shall be Class I B I (Class A) of 11F12" as defined and required by the Uniform Building Code 1991 Edition. A. Modified Bitumen Roofing: Shall be equal to Siplast Paradiene 20/30 FR modified bitumen roofing system. 1. Base Sheet; Paradiene 20 2. Top Sheet; Paradiene 30 3. Vertical flashings; Veral B. Other Approved Manufacturers: 1. Tamko #101 Awaplan Premium FR 2. GAF #NN-1-iMB with Ruberoid MB FR Plus membrane and granular finished parapet flashing. 3. Nord Bitumi system with Nordflex Ultra membrane and granular- finished parapet flashing. 4. Manville system with Dynakap FR.membrane and granular finished parapet flashing. C. Provide manufacturer's standard roof walk way system. Granular finish color shall be a contrasting color with that of the typical roof finish. 2.2. SHEET METAL ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Refer to Section 07600, "FLASHING AND SHEET METAL." �. B. Zinc -Coated Steel: ASTM A 526/A 526M, with 0.20 percent copper, G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; 0.0359 inches thick (22 gage), except as otherwise indicated. C. Solder for Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated or -- recommended by metal manufacturer, provide 50/50 tin/lead type (ASTM B 32) for tinning and soldering joints; use rosin flux. 2.3. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Wood Members, Units: Comply with requirements of "Carpentry" sections of these specifications for nailers, walkway units, and other wood members indicated as roofing - system work. Provide wood pressure treated with waterborne 07512 - 4 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 preservatives for above -ground use (AWPB LP-2). i B. Substrate Joint Tape: 6-inch or 8-inch-wide coated glass - fiber joint tape. C. Fasteners: Provide industry -standard types of mechanical fasteners for insulation installation, tested by manufacturer for required pull-out strength where applicable and compatible with deck type and roofing products used. Provide either 1-inch-diameter nail heads or 1-3/8-inch- diameter by 30-gage sheet metal caps for nails used to secure base sheets, felts, or insulation boards of roofing system. 2.4. FABRICATION OF SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES i A. SMACNA and NRCA Details: Conform work with details shown ' and with applicable fabrication requirements of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA. Comply with installation details of "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual,, by NRCA. B. Prefabricate units as indicated or provide standard manufactured units complying with requirements; fabricate from sheet metal indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, from lead -coated copper. - C. Provide 4-inch-wide flanges for setting on built-up asphalt roofing system membrane with concealment by composition stripping. D. Fabricate work with flat -lock soldered joints and seams; except where joint movement is necessary, provide 1-inch- deep interlocking hooked flanges filled with mastic sealant. E. Fabricate penetration sleeves with minimum 8-inch-high stack, of diameter 1 inch larger than penetrating element. Counterfl.ashing is specified as work of another section of these specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSPECTION OF SUBSTRATE A. .Examine substrate surfaces to receive built-up roofing system and associated work and conditions under which roofing will be installed. Do not proceed with roofing ,. until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING 07512 - 5 r �'a NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS — A. Protect other work from spillage of built-up roofing materials, and prevent liquid materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace/restore other work damaged by installation of built-up roofing system work. B. Insurance/Code Compliance: Install built-up roofing system for (and test where required to show) compliance with governing regulations and with the following insurance requirements: — 1. Factory Mutual requirements for "Class I" or "Noncombustible," including zoned wind resistance as — specified by FM. 2. Underwriters Laboratories "Fire Classified" and "Class 60" wind uplift resistance. C. Coordinate the installation of insulation, roofing sheets, flashings, stripping, coatings, and surfacings so that insulation and felts are not exposed to precipitation or — exposed overnight. Provide cut offs at end of each day s work, to cover exposed felts and insulation with a course of coated felt with joints and edges sealed with roofing — cement. Remove cut offs immediately before resuming work. Glaze -coat installed ply -sheet courses at end of each day's work where final surfacing has not been installed. D. Cutoffs: At end of each day's roofing installation, protect exposed edge of incomplete work, including ply sheets and insulation. Provide temporary covering .of 2 plies of No. 15 roofing felt set in full moppings of hot bitumen; remove at beginning of next day's work. Glaze -coat areas of completed organic ply sheets which cannot be flood -coated and aggregate -surfaced before end of each days work. — 3.3. ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION: These specifications are based on the Siplast Roof System: other installations shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A. Beginning at the low point of the roof, lay 1 ply of Paradiene 20 in full coating PA-311 Adhesive. Lap sides and ends a minimum of 3 inches. Offset end laps a minimum of 3 feet. B. Beginning again at ,the low point of the roof, fully adhere 1 ply of Paradiene 30 to the Paradiene 20 surface using Type 07512 - 6 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 IV asphalt. Lap sides and ends a minimum of 3 inches. Offset end laps a minimum of 3 feet. Stagger laps between plies.r edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces. C. Cant Strips/Tapered Edge Strips: Except as otherwise shown, install preformed 45-deg. insulation cant strips at juncture I of roofing system membrane with vertical surface. Provide preformed, tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces. i' D. Set -On Accessories: Where small roof accessories are set on built-up roofing membrane, set metal flanges in a bed of roofing cement and seal penetration of membrane with bead of roofing cement to prevent flow of bitumen from membrane. t. 3.4. OTHER INSTALLATIONS: A. Roof Drains: Fill clamping ring base with a heavy coating of roofing cement. Set lead flashing sheet in a bed of roofing cement on completed built-up roofing ply sheet courses, with lead sheet clamped in roof drain ring and extended 12 inches onto roofing. Cover lead sheet with composition stripping, with plies extended 4 inches to 6 inches beyond edges of lead sheet. Provide composition stripping of gravel stop rings ( if any) . B. Allow for expansion of running metal flashing and edge trim which adjoins roofing. Do not seal or bond membrane or t composition flashing and stripping to metal flanges over.3 l feet in length. C. Counter-flashings: Counter-flashings, cap flashings, expansion joints, and similar work are to be coordinated with built-up roofing work. of these specifications. rD. Roof Accessories: Miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items, including insulation vents and other devices, and major items of roof accessories (if any) are to be (r' coordinated with built-up roofing system work. E. The Veral system is preferably applied by torching, which utilizes the closely controlled high -melt asphalt in the sheets themselves. The Irex is first applied to the substrate and is lapped a minimum of 3 inches both side and end. The Veral is then applied to the Irex with 3 inch side and end laps positioned so as not to coincide with those of the Irex. The finished assembly provides a strong, flexible glass - reinforced membrane, completely shielded from the elements. MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING F 07512 - 7 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 Veral may be applied with Type IV asphalt in lieu of torching, subject to the limitations contained in the "Fastening Schedule". When asphalt is used, laps must be sealed by torching. 3.5. PROTECTION OF ROOFING A. Upon completion of roofing' (including associated work), institute appropriate procedures for surveillance and protection of roofing during remainder of construction period. At end of construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will in no way affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing and prepare a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner, describing nature and extent of deterioration or damage found. B. Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found at time of above inspection to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and in accordance with requirements of specified warranty. END OF SECTION 07511 07512 - 8 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 l SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal counter flashing and base flashing (if any). 2. Metal wall flashing. 3. Built-in scuppers. 4. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. B. Integral masonry flashings are specified as masonry work in sections of Division 4. C. Roofing accessories installed integral with roofing membrane are specified in roofing system sections as roofing work. D. Roof accessory units of premanufactured, set -on type are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data, Flashing, Sheet Metal, and Accessories: Manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product. 1.4. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and finishes. 7 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600 - 1 t NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS A. Zinc -Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20 percent copper, ASTM A 526 except ASTM A 527 for lock -forming, G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; 0.0359-inch thick (20 gage) except as otherwise indicated. B. Copper: ASTM 370; temper HOO except where o6o is required for `- forming, 16 oz. except where shown otherwise. C. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories: 1. Solder: For use with steel or copper, provide 50 - 50 tin/lead solder (ASTM B 32), with rosin flux. 2. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent -type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. 3. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, non-drying,- nonmigrating sealant. 4. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." 5. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet. 6. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance. 7. Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed -cell polyethylene or other soft closed -cell material recommended by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet. 8. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic. 2.2. FABRICATED UNITS A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop -fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal 07600 - 2 1 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather -resistant performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil -canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat - lock seams. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required. C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards. j E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator. PART 3 - EXECUTION sp 3.1. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor +- units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing *` cement where required for waterproof performance. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600 - 3 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 C. Install elastomeric flashing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where required, provide for movement at joints by forming loops or bellows in width of flashing. Locate cover or filler strips at joints to facilitate complete drainage of water from flashing. Seam adjacent flashing sheets with adhesive, seal and anchor edges in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Nail flanges of expansion joint units to curb nailers, at maximum spacing of 6 inches o.c. Fabricate seams at joints between units with minimum 3-inch overlap, to form a _ continuous, waterproof. system. 3.2. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might _ cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work '- during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion. -- END OF SECTION 07600 07600 - 4 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 Poo SECTION 07700 - ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL f' 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: Ei A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General p.. and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent and locations of roof accessories is indicated on the drawings and by provisions of this section. B. Types of units specified in this section include the following: 1. Roof hatches. _. C. Refer to roofing system sections of these specifications for roofing accessories to be built into roofing system (not work of this section) . 1.3. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data; Roof Accessories: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, rough -in diagrams, details, installation instructions and general product recommendations. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Heat/Smoke Vent Compliance Labels: Provide roof hatch units which have been tested, listed and labeled as follows: 1. Construction/Operation: UL-labeled. 2. Fire Resistance of Lids: UL Class "A". B. Standards: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap- flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. Comply with "NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installation of units. ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700 - 1 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: A. Provide manufacturers' standard units, modified as necessary to comply with requirements. Shop fabricate each unit to greatest extent possible. 2.2. MATERIALS, GENERAL: A. Zinc -Coated Steel: Commercial ,quality with 0.20 percent copper, ASTM A 525, G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized. B. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi -rigid board of glass fiber of thicknesses indicated. C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with water- borne preservatives for above -ground use, complying with AWPB LP-2; not less than 1-1/2" thick. D. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or -� nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. t E. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. F. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer, which is compatible with joint surfaces; comply with FS TT-S-00227E, TT-S-00230C, or TT-S-001543A. G. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic. 2.3. PREFABRICATED ROOF HATCHES: A. General: Fabricate units of sizes shown, single -leaf type unless otherwise indicated, for 40 lbs. per sq. ft. external loading and 20 lbs. per sq. ft. internal loading pressure. Frame with 9" high integral -curb double -wall construction with 1-1/2" insulation, cant strips and cap flashing (roofing counter -flashing), with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints. Provide double -wall cover (lid) construction with 1" insulation core. Equip units with complete hardware set -` including safety pole, hold -open devices, interior padlock hasps, and both interior and exterior latch handles. Provide gasketing. Fabricate units of following materials: -- 07700 -2 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES _L NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1. Materials: Aluminum or zinc -coated steel, or in combination, at Contractor's option. B. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1/4" per ft., fabricate hatch curbs with height tapered to match slope, to result in level installation of tops of units. C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide prefabricated roof hatch units by one of the following: 1. Bilco Co.; New Haven, CT 2. Bohem Skylites, Inc.; Burlington, NJ 3. Bristol Fiberlite Industries; Santa Anna, CA 4. Faulkner Plastics, Inc.; Tampa, FL 5. Hillsdale Industries, Inc.; Knoxville, TN 6. Naturalite, Inc.; Garland, TX 7. Milcor, Inc.; Lima, OH 8. O'Keefe's, Inc.; San Francisco, CA 9. Plasteco, Inc.; Houston, TX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION: A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units, and vapor barriers, roof insulation, roofing and flashing; as required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly, and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses as well as inward and outward loading pressures. 1. Except as otherwise indicated install roof accessory items !' in accordance with construction details of "NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual". B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in contact with noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation. C. Flange Seals: Except as otherwise indicated, set flanges of ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement, to form a seal. D. Cap Flashing: Where cap flashing is required as component of accessory, install to provide adequate waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counter- flashing). Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant, except where overlap is indicated to be left open for ventilation. E. Operational Units: Test operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation. 3.2. CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. B. Clean and polish plastic skylight units, inside and out, not more than 5 days prior to date of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 07700 V f_ 07700 -4 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General. and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY: A. Extent of each form and type of joint sealer is indicated on drawings and schedules. B. This Section includes joint sealers for the following locations: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below. a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Joints between different materials. c. Perimeter joints between materials and at perimeter joints at frames of doors and windows. d. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings. b.. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows. c. Other joints as indicated. 3. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surface as indicated below: a. Control, expansion and isolation joints in cast -in - place concrete slabs. b. Joints between different materials listed above. c. Other joints as indicated. C. Sealants for glazing purposes are specified in Division-8 Section "Glass and Glazing." t� JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 D. Sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum drywall partitions to reduce sound transmission characteristics is specified in Division-9 Section "Gypsum Drywall." 1.3. SYSTEM PERFORMANCES: A. Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals. " 1.4. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data from manufacturers for each joint sealer product required, including. instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application. _ B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. C. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. 1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has n successfully completed within the last 3 years at least 3 joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this Project. B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for.each different product required. C. Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealer based on tests conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory on current product formulations within a 24-month period preceding date of. Contractor's submittal of test results to Architect. D. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test their adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 07901 - 2 JOINT SEALANTS r- NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1 1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: E. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealers, apply elastomeric sealants to the following selected building joints as indicated below for further verification of colors selected from sample submittals and to represent completed work for qualities of appearance, materials, and application: 1. Joints in field -constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other sections which are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants specified in this section. 2. Retain mock-ups during construction as standard for judging completed construction. 1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturers. 2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS, GENERAL: A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 3 I NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated," as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.2. ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS: A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. B. One -Part Nonacid -Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and complying with the following requirements for Uses and additional joint movement capability: 1. Uses NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates _ indicated, 0. C. One -Part Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates; intended for sealing joints with nonporous substrates and subject to in- service exposure to conditions of high humidity and �- temperature extremes. D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealants which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. One -Part Nonacid -Curing Silicone Sealant: a. "Dow Corning 790"; Dow Corning Corp. b. "Silglaze II 2800"; General Electric Co. C. "Silpruf"; General Electric Co. d. 11890"; Pecora Corp. e. "Spectrum 111; Tremco, Inc. f. "Spectrum 211; Tremco, Inc. 2.3. POLYURETHANE A. Two-part conforming to FSTT-S-00022TE, Class A, Type I or II, Grade P 1. Uses T and 0 B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, polyurethane sealants which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 07901 - 4 JOINT SEALANTS NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 r f 1. Two-part Polyurethane sealant: a. NR-2000, Pecora b. No. 200, PRC r c. SL2 Sealant, Sonneborn i d. THC - 900/901, Tremco 2.4. JOINT SEALANT BACKING: A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible, nongassing plastic foam of material indicated below; nonabsorbent to water and gas; and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 1. Either open -cell polyurethane foam or closed -cell polyethylene foam, unless otherwise indicated, subject to approval of sealant manufacturer, for cold -applied sealants only. C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to -26 deg F (-15 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.5. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealer - substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable to JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 5 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials, and which coo not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service _ performance. C. Masking Tape: Provide nonstaining, nonabsorbent type compatible with .joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION: A. - Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2. PREPARATION: A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with 'adhesion of.joint sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility bysealantmanufacturer; old joint sealers; oil; grease; waterproofing; water repellants; water; surface dirt; and frost. 2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint substrate surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by' vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile; and other nonporous surfaces by chemical _ cleaners or other means which are not harmful to 07901 - 6 JOINT SEALANTS i f NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 i B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on r preconstruction joint sealer -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto G adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3. INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS: A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and .joint fillers, compression seals, or back of joints where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant failure. 3. Install compressible seals serving as sealant backings to comply with requirements indicated above for joint fillers. C. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 C. Installation of, Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses -- provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. D. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 3.4. CLEANING: A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur. 3.5. PROTECTION: A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealer installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 07900 07901 - 8 JOINT SEALANTS NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOOR FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of standard steel frames is indicated and scheduled on drawings. B. Finish hardware is specified elsewhere in Division-8. C. Building in of anchors and grouting of frames in masonry construction is specified in Division 4. 1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Provide frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI-100) and as herein specified. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire -rated door assemblies are indicated or required, provide fire -rated frame assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 "Standard for Fire Doors and Windows", and have been tested, listed, and labeled in accordance with ASTM E 152 "Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies" by a nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of frame design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1. Provide schedule of frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings. STEEL DOOR FRAMES 08110-1 0 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 2. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering steel door frames which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steel door frames by one of the following: 1. Steel Frames, (General): a. Allied Steel Products, Inc. b. Anweld/Div. American Welding & Mfg. Co. c. Ceco Corp. d. Copco Door Co. e. Curries Mfg., Inc. f. Dittco Products, Inc. g. Fenestra Corp. h. Kewanee Corp. i. Mesker Industries, Inc. j. Pioneer Bldrs. Products Corp./Div. CORE Industries, Inc. k. Steelcraft/Div. American Standard Co. 1. Trussbilt, Inc. m. Republic Builders Products Corp./Subs. Republic Steel. 2.2. MATERIALS: A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets Zinc -coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 gage galvanized sheet steel. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: ManufacturerIsstandard units, except hot -dip galvanize items to be built into exterior 08110-2 STEEL DOOR FRAMES NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 r., walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. F. Shop Applied Paint: 1. Primer: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air - drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. 2.3. FABRICATION, GENERAL: A. Fabricate steel door frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory - assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with SDI-100 requirements as follows: B. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either cold -rolled or hot - rolled steel (at fabricator's option). C. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts. 1. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for frame preparation for hardware. 2. Reinforce frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied finish hardware may be done at project site. 3. Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and Hardware Institute. D. Shop Painting: 1. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. 3. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. FSTEEL DOOR FRAMES 08110-3 r- NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 2.4. STANDARD DOOR STEEL FRAMES: A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles'as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 14-gage cold -rolled furniture steel. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered corners, welded construction for exterior applications and knocked -down for field assembly at interior applications. B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -swing frames and 2 silencers on heads of double -swing frames. C. Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. PART 3 = EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION: A. General: Install standard sheet frames and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, and manufacturer's data. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated. 1. Except for frames located at in -place concrete or masonry and at drywall installations, place frames prior to "- construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 2. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. 3. At in -place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. — 4. Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA Std. No. 80. 5. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire 08110-4 STEEL DOOR FRAMES NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws. 3.2. ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Prime Coat Touch -Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air -drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors. C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION 08110 STEEL DOOR FRAMES 08110-5 PM t NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS Poo PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUMMARY: A. Extent and location of each type of flush wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules. B. Types of doors required include the following: 1. Solid core flush wood doors with wood veneer faces. C. Metal door frames for flush wood doors are specified in another Division-8 section. 7 t 1.3. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of door, including details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and louvers, and factory -finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards: 1. NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S.1 "Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors", of National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA) . 2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"; including Section 1300 "Architectural Flush Doors", of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for grade of door, core construction, finish and other requirements exceeding those of NWWDA quality standard. .. B. NWWDA Quality Marking: Mark each wood door with NWWDA Wood Flush Door Certification Hallmark certifying compliance with FLUSH WOOD DOORS r b p e, 08211-1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 applicable requirements of NWWDA I.S. 1 Series. 1. For manufacturers not participating in NWWDA Hallmark Program, a certification of compliance may be substituted for marking of individual doors. C. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors which are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 152 and which are labeled and listed for ratings indicated by UL, Warnock Hersey or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well as with manufacturer's instructions. B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings. 1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until -- conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to project's geographical location: 1. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-S- 3 "Moisture Content". A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that 08211-2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS "- NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 r, show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do t not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. 1. Warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of Substantial Completion. 3. Solid Core Interior Doors: a. Life of installation. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering doors which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc 2. Buell Door Company. 3. Cal -Wood Door Div., Timberland Industries, Inc. 4. Chappell Door Company. 5. Doors, Incorporated. 6. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division. 7. Gay Doors, Inc. 8. Glen -Mar Door Mfg. Co. 9. Graham Manufacturing Corp. 10. Ipik Door Co., Inc. 11. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 12. Weyerhauser Company. 2.2. INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS: ( A. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements: r 1. Faces: Red Oak - Plain sawn. r, FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-3 Rr� t.: NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 2. AWI Grade: Custom. 3. Construction: PC-5 or PC-7 (Particleboard core, 5- or 7- Ply) 4. Construction: SLC-5 or SLC-7 (Glued block core, 5- or 7- ply). B. Fire -Rated Solid Core Doors: Comply with the following — requirements as indicated on the drawings. C. Faces and AWI Grade: Provide faces and grade to match non- rated doors in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction as required to provide fire -resistance rating indicated. 2. Edge Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated edge construction for improved screw -holding capability and split resistance as compared to edges composed of a single layer of treated lumber. 2.3. LIGHT FRAMES: A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard fire -rated wood -veneer beads matching veneer species of door faces. 2.4.FABRICATION: A. Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying with -- following requirements: 1. In sizes indicated for job -site fitting. — a. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory premachining. B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of doors required. -- 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. C. Transparent Finish: Shop seal faces and edges of doors for transparent finish with stain (if required) and other required pretreatments and first coat of finish as specified in the -� following: 1. Division-9 section "Painting". 08211-4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS — r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 rr PART 3 - EXECUTION i 3.1. EXAMINATION: A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door: 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2. INSTALLATION: A. Hardware: For installation see Division-8 "Finish Hardware" section of these specifications. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and of referenced AWI standard and as indicated. 1. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No. 80. C. Job -Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Fitting Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: Complying with NFPA 80. END OF SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS F d. 08211-5 r� 4 r- NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 F SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS t: MW PART.1 GENERAL i` 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of aluminum entrance and storefront work: 1. Exterior entrance doors. 2. Vestibule doors matching entrance doors. 3. Transoms. 4. Sidelights. 5. Frames for entrances. 6. Storefront -type framing system. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Glazing requirements for aluminum entrances and storefront, including entrances specified to be factory glazed, are included in Division 8 Section "Glass and r Glazing." 2. Lock cylinders are included in Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware." r 1.3. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS r A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies that comply with performance characteristics specified, as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's corresponding stock r assemblies according to test methods indicated. B. Thermal Movement: Design the aluminum entrance and storefront r framing systems to provide for expansion and contraction of the component materials. Entrance doors shall function normally over the specified temperature range. r 1. The system shall be capable of withstanding_ a metal surface temperature range of 180 deg F (100 deg C) without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on T structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 1 r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 manufacturer. 1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the manufacturer's original protective packaging. B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air. 1. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or permanent damage. 1.7. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work. 1. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit. 1.8. WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration. 2. Faulty operation. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering. B. Warranty Period: Three (3) years after the date of Substantial Completion, for aluminum doors, frames and operating mechanisms. One (1) year for all other aluminum storefront work, C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under 08410 - 4 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 ` 2.1. MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering entrance and storefront systems that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amarlite Architectural Products. 2. Kawneer Company, Inc. 3. PPG Industries. 4. Rebco, Inc. 5. United States Aluminum Corp. 2.2. MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire. _. 1. Extrusion shall be 6063-T5 alloy and tempra. B. Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply with ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A 570 for hot rolled sheet and strip. C. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section of these specifications. D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw -anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed -in splined grommet nuts. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of hardware. For application of hardware, use Phillips flat -head machine screws that match the finish of member or hardware being fastened. E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead -soft stainless steel, or 0.026-inch-thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 5 r 7, NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 for application of hardware. For application of hardware, use Phillips flat -head machine screws that match the finish of member or hardware being fastened. E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead -soft stainless steel, or 0.026-inch-thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components. F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high -strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not "- feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123. G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or hot -dip galvanized steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123. H. Compression Weatherstripping: . Manufacturer's standard replaceable compressible weatherstripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287. I. Sliding Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.2. 2.3. HARDWARE A. General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for requirements for hardware items other than those indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer. B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required; finish to match door. 1. Ball -Bearing Butts: 5-knuckle, 2-bearings, steel ball bearing butts sized to comply with ANSI A156.1, Grade 1. Provide 2 butts for doors 7 feet 6 inches or less; provide 3 butts for taller and heavier doors. 2. Surface -Mounted Overhead Closers: Modern type with cover, for parallel -arm -type mounting installation. Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for closer size, depending on door size, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. 3. Door Stop: Floor- or wall -mounted door stop, as appropriate, with integral rubber bumper; comply with ANSI A156.16, Grade 1. 08410 - 6 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 6. Pull Handles: Aluminum pull handles of style indicated. 7. Thresholds: Extruded aluminum threshold of size and design indicated in mill finish, complete with anchors and clips, coordinated with pivots and floor -concealed closers. 8. Automatic Swing Door Operator: Completely self-contained, electro -hydraulic with outswing arm, surface mounted to the concrete transom bar and shall include push button handicapped switch operator controls equal to Series 1800 HANDICAPPED OPERATOR AND ACTIVATING DEVICES as manufactured by Keane Monroe Corporation. 2.4. COMPONENTS A. Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront and entrance framing systems fabricated from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include subframes and other reinforcing members of the type indicated. Provide for flush glazing storefront from the exterior on all sides without projecting stops. Shop -fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. Provide storefront frame sections without exposed seams. 1. Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face to receive resilient elastomeric glazing. Mullions and horizontals shall be one piece. Make provisions to drain moisture accumulation to the exterior. 2. Drawings and specifications are based upon the TRIFAB lI 451 system as manufactured by the Kawneer Company, Inc. B. Entrance Door Frames: Provide tubular and channel frame entrance door frame assemblies, as indicated, with welded or mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer's standards. Reinforce as necessary to support required loads. 1. Drawings and specifications are based upon the TRIFAB II 451 system as manufactured by the Kawneer Company, Inc. 2. Removable steel mullion shall be equal to Dor-o-matic RM-70. C. Stile -and -Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie -rods or j -bolts. F ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 7 L l NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels,; without disassembly of stiles and rails. Provide snap -on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops anchored for nonremoval. 2. Design: Provide 1-3/4-inch-thick doors of design indicated. — a. Wide stile (5 inches wide). 3. Drawings and specifications are based upon the Series 500 doors as manufactured by the Kawneer Company, Inc. 2.5. FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions___ required, to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. _ B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent — possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes. 2. Do not drill and tap for surface -mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site. 3. Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible. C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical finish. 1. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished surface. D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity. 08410 - 8 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 E. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable sealant, or a nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead. F. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members. 1. Uniformity of Metal Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members shall not have an integral color or texture variation greater than half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal. G. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. H. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weatherstripping against fixed stops. At other edges, provide sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 1. Provide EPDM or vinyl -blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold. 2. At interior doors and other locations without weatherstripping, provide neoprene silencers on stops to prevent metal -to -metal contact. 2.6. FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class I Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.7 mil) complying with AAMA 607.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect installation of ALUMINUM ENTRANCE$ AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 9 L, .NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 E. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable sealant, or a nonabsorptive plastic or — elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead. F. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members. 1. Uniformity of Metal Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members shall not have an integral color or texture variation greater than half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal. G. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. H. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weatherstripping against fixed stops. At other edges, provide sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 1. Provide EPDM or vinyl -blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold. 2. At interior doors and other locations without weatherstripping, provide neoprene silencers on stops to prevent metal -to -metal contact. -- 2.6. FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class I Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.7 mil) complying with AAMA 607.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, 08410 - 10 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 F F. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for sealants, fillers, and gaskets. G. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other panels indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, and not preglazed by manufacturer. 3.3. ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for weathertight closure. 3.4. CLEANING A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings. B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the "Glass and Glazing" Section for• cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces. 3.5. PROTECTION A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. 3.6. ALUMINUM DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. END OF SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 11 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. F. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements -of Division for sealants, fillers, and gaskets. G. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other panels indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, and not preglazed by manufacturer. 3.3. ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for weathertight closure. 3.4. CLEANING A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings. B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the "Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces. 3.5. PROTECTION A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. 3.6. ALUMINUM DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. END OF SECTION 08410 08410 - 12 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Definition: "Finish Hardware" includes items known commercially as finish hardware which are required for swing doors, except special types of unique and non -matching hardware specified in the same section as the door and door frame. B. Extent of finish hardware required is indicated on drawings and in schedules. C. All "Finish Hardware" shall comply fully with applicable "ADA" Standards and Regulations. 1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. B. Supplier: A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of not less than 2 years, and who is, or who employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about project's hardware requirements, to Owner, Architect and Contractor. C. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire -rated openings in compliance with NFPA Standard No. 80 and local building code requirements. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL or FM for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels. FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 1 r L NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1.4. SUBMITTALS: — A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data for each item of hardware in accordance with Division-1 section "Submittals". Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finishes. B. Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in manner indicated below. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and A related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. 1.5. PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Tag each item or package -.separately, with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. B. Packaging of hardware is. responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packaged in same container. C. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. D. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or project site) for installation. E. Provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 08710 - 2 FINISH HARDWARE NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 F 2.1. MATERIALS AND FABRICATION: A. General: 1. Hand of door: Drawings show direction of swing or hand of each door leaf . Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown. 2. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. 3. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. ,., Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. 4. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed, except to extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where ,. bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work, except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. In such cases, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. S. Tools and Maintenance Instructions for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of finish hardware. 6. All hardware shallbe made in the U.S.A., not just assembled in U.S.A. 7. All closers shall be cast-iron. d 8. All locks shall have cast levers and wroght trim. Die- cast not acceptable. r a 2.2. WEATHERSTRIPPING: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated,iprovide continuous weatherstripping at each edge of every exterior door leaf. Provide type, sizes and profiles shown or Scheduled. Provide non -corrosive fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where FINISH HARDWARE r• i 08710 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and -- readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. C. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: 1. Provide bumper -type resilient insert and metal retainer strips, surface -applied unless shown as mortised or semi - mortised, of following metal, finish and resilient bumper material: a. Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish; 0.062" minimum thickness of 'main walls and flanges. b. Closed -cell sponge neoprene insert, conforming to MIL R 6130A Type II, Grade II, 1/4" x 3/411. - D. Weatherstripping at Door Bottoms: r- 1. Provide threshold consisting of contact type resilient insert and metal housing of design and size shown; of following metal, finish, and resilient seal strip. 'a. Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish; 0.0621,_ minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. b. Solid neoprene wiper or sweep seal complying with MIL 1 R 6055, Class II, Grade 40 or: c. Flexible vinyl wiper or sweep seal strip complying with CS 230-60. r- 2.3. THRESHOLDS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size and profile as required to conform to sweep strips above. Units to be 4" x 1/2" aluminum. �— PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION: A. Mount Hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by Architect. B., Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or 08710 - 4 FINISH HARDWARE NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 r-r into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division-9 sections. Do not install surface - mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. 4 C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory -prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl -rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. 3.2. ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. D. Instruct Owner s Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. FINISH HARDWARE O8710 - 5 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3.3. HARDWARE SCHEDULE - (all finishes, whether called out or not, shall be equal to Us26D unless indicated otherwise) HEADING #1 Sgl. Dr. #2 @ Exterior, each door to have• 1 Exit Device 33EO ALK-S2 x 313 Von Duprin 1 Cylinders 1000 x 613 Corbin 1 Stop W1258M x Us32D Trimco 3 Silencers Trimco HEADING #2 Pr. Drs. #3 @ Exterior 2 Exit device 33L x 313 Von Duprin ` 1 Mullion 5654 x 154 x 313AN Von Duprin 2 Cylinders 1000 x 613 Cobin 1 Stop 1258M x Us26D Trimco HEADING #3 Pr. Drs. #4 Chair Storage, #4 AV Storage each pair to have 6 Hinges 1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us26D Hager 2 Surface Bolts 1632/1632 x SNB Glynn -Johnson x Us 26D 1 Lockset CL3657 NZD 612 @ Storage Corbin 1 Lockset CL3657 NZD M21 612 @ Corbin Janitor 2 Wall stops W1279CCS X Us26D Trimco �- 2 Silencers Trimco HEADING #4 Sgl. Dr. #5 Exterior -� each door to have 1 Exit device 33L x 313 Von Duprin 1 Cylinder 1000 x 613 Corbin 1 Closer 4040CUSH x Stat LCN 1 Stop 1258M x Us26D, Balance Trimco of hardware by door supplier " 08710 - 6 FINISH HARDWARE NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 HEADING #4A Sgl. Dr. #6 @ Work Room, #7 @ Rm 106 each door to have 3 Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us26D Hager 1 Lockset CL3655 NZD 612 Corbin 1 Closer DC3210 M54 691 Corbin 1 Kickplate 12 x DW-2" x Us26D Trimco 1 Wall stop W1279CCS x Us26D Trimco 3 Silencers Trimco HEADER #5 Pr. Drs. #2A Janitors Rm. each pair to have 6 Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us26D Hager 1 Lockset CL3655 NZD 612 Corbin 1 Coordinator 3090 x UsP Trimco 2 Closer DC3210 M54 691 Corbin 2 Kickplate 12 x DW-2" x Us26D Trimco 2 Wall stop W1279CCS x Us26D Trimco 6 Silencers Trimco 2 Cane Bolts 23/244 x Us26D Trimco HEADING #5A Pr. Drs. #2 @ Meeting Room each pair to have 6 Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10 Hager 2 Exit device 33EO ALK-52 x 313 Van Duprin 2 Cylinders 1000 x 613 Corbin 2 Closers DC3210 M54 691 Corbin 2 Kickplate 12 x DW-2" x Us10 Trimco 2 Wall stops W1279 CCS x Us10 Trimco 6 Silencers Trimco FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 HEADING #6 Sgl. Dr. #3 @ Restrooms each door to have 3 Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us26D Hager 1 Push/Pull Latch 1563P x Us10/26D Trimco 1 Closer DC3210 M54 689 Corbin 1 Kickplate 12 x DW-211 x Us32D Trimco 1 Wall stop W1279CCS x Us 32D Trimco 3 Silencers Trimco HEADING #7 Pr. Drs. #5 @ Kitchenette each pair to have 6 Hinges 1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us26D Hager 2 Surface Bolts 1632/163 SNB x Glynn -Johnson Us26D 1 Lockset CL3651 NZD 612 Corbin 2 Wall stop W1279CCS x Us26D Trimco 2 Silencers Trimco HEADING #8 Sgl. Dr. #3 @ Toilet each door to have 3 Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us26D Hager 1 Privacy 3620 NZD 612 Trimco 1 Closer DC3210 M54 691 Corbin 1 Kickplate 12 x DW-211 x Us26D Trimco 1 Wall stop W1279CCS x Us26D Trimco 3 Silencers Trimco HEADING #9 Sgl. Dr. #1 @ Office, each door to have: 3 Hinges 1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us26D Hager 1 Lockset CL3651 NZD 612 Trimco 1 Wall Stop W1279CCS x Us32D Trimco 3 Silencers Trimco 08710 - 8 FINISH HARDWARE NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 HEADING #10 Sgl. Dr. #3 @ Tele/Elec. each door to have 3 Hinges 1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us26D 1 Lockset CL3657 NZD M21 612 1 Wall stop W1279CCS x Us32D 3 Silencers HEADING #11 Pr. Drs. #8 a Collections each pair to have 2 Exit devices 33L x 313 1 Mullion 5654 x 154 x 313AN 2 Cylinders 1000 x 613 Balance of hardware -by door supplier END OF SECTION 08710 Hagar Trimco Trimco Trimco Von Duprin Von Duprin Corbin FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 9 r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING 11 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUMMARY: A. Extent of glass and glazing work is indicated on drawings and schedules. B. Types of work in this section include glass and glazing for: 1. Storefront construction. 2. Entrances and other doors, not indicated as "preglazed". 1.3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: �., A. Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading (where applicable) , without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials and other defects in the work. 1. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient temperature range of 120 deg. F (67 deg. C) and from a consequent temperature range within glass and glass framing members of 180 deg. F (100 deg. C). 2. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal due to other causes than breakage which results in intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coating, if any, resulting from seal failure, and any other visual evidence of seal failure or performance. GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1.4. SUBMITTALS:_ A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material and fabricated glass product required, including installation and maintenance instructions. B. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, 12",square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear single pane units, and 12" long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative of adjoining framing system in color. C. Certificate: Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements. 1. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: Submit statement from sealant manufacturer indicating that glass and glazing materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants and interpreting test results relative to material performance, including recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. 1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards. B. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing -- requirements of 15 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 08800 - 2 GLASS AND GLAZING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 C. Fire Resistance Rated Wire Glass: Provide wire glass products that are identical to those tested per ASTM E 163 (UL 9) and are labeled and listed by UL or other testing and inspecting r` agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. f D. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component pane of units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing organization indicated below: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI). E. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type and class required. 1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: *w A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with manufacturer's directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass '... and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other causes. 1. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, avoid hermetic seal ruptures by complying with insulating glass fabricator's recommendations for venting and sealing. 1.7. PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes. 1. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40 deg. F (4.4 deg. C). GLASS AND GLAZING 06800 - 3 NORTHWEST:BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1.8. WARRANTY: A. Generale Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Special Project Warranty on Insulating Glass: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed project site, within specified warranty period indicated below, replacements for those insulating glass units developing manufacturing defects. Manufacturing defects are defined as failure or hermetic seal of air space (beyond that due to glass breakage) as evidenced by intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coatings, if any, and other visual indications of seal failure or performance; provided the manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting and maintaining units have been complied with during the warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Manufacturers of Clear and Tinted Float Glass: a. Ford Glass Division. (Sunglas Green where tinted) b. Guardian Industries Corp. (Green where tinted) c. LOF Glass, Inc. (Ever Green where tinted) d. PPG Industries, Inc. (Solar Green where tinted) 3. Manufacturers of Wire Glass: a. Ford Glass Division b. LOF Glass, Inc. c. PPF Industries, Inc. Manufacturers of Insulating Glass: a. Ford Glass Division. (Sunglas Green where tinted) b. Guardian Industries Corp. (Green where tinted) c. PPG Industries, Inc. (SOLAR GREEN where tinted) d. LOF Glass Inc. (Evergreen where tinted) 08800 - 4 GLASS AND GLAZING 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 2.2. GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL: A. Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass which complies with ASTM C 1036 requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, class, quality, and, if applicable, form, finish, mesh and pattern. B. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by glass manufacturer for application indicated. 2.3. PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS: A. Clear Float Glass: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select); fully tempered where required by applicable codes or as shown on the Drawings. B. Tinted Float Glass: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing and light reducing), Quality q3 (glazing.select), fully tempered and as follows: 1. Green: Manufacturers standard tint, with visible light t transmittance of 65-67 percent and shading coefficient of l 0.59- 0.61 percent for 1/411 thick glass. C. Wired Glass: Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (translucent), Quality q8 (glazing); complying with ANSI Z97.1; 1/411 thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated below: 1. Polished Wire Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), Mesh m2 (square) . 2.4. HEAT -TREATED GLASS PRODUCTS: A. Manufacturing Process: Manufacture heat -treated glass as follows: 1. By horizontal (roller hearth) process with roll wave distortion parallel with bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. d GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 5 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 2.5. SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS: A. General: Provide preassembled units consisting of organically ^ sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space and complying with ASTM E 774 for performance classification indicated as well as with other requirements specified for glass characteristics, air space, sealing system, sealant, spacer material, corner design and desiccant. 1. For properties of individual glass panes making up units, refer to product requirements specified elsewhere in this section applicable to types, classes, kinds and conditions of glass products indicated. 2. Provide heat -treated panes of kind and at locations indicated or, if not indicated, provide heat -strengthened panes where recommended by manufacturer for application -- indicated and tempered where indicated or where safety glass is designated or required. 3. Performance characteristics designated for coated _ insulating glass are nominal values based on manufacturer's published test data for units with 1/4" thick panes of glass and 1/2" thick air space. a. U-values indicated are expressed in the number of Btu's per hour per sq. ft. per degree F difference. 4. Performance Classification per ASTM E 774: Class A. a. Thickness of Each Pane: 1/411. b. Air Space Thickness: 1/211. c. Sealing System: Manufacturer's standard. d. Spacer Material: Manufacturer's standard metal. 5. Desiccant: Manufacturer's standard; either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both. 6. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction. B. Uncoated Insulating Glass Units: Manufacturer's standard units complying with the following requirements: 1. Exterior Pane: Tinted float glass or clear float glass as indicated on the Drawings. a. Tint: Green b . Kind FT ( fully tempered, where shown in the Drawings) . 08800 - 6 GLASS AND GLAZING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 2.6. A. 2. Interior Pane of Glass: Clear float glass. a. Kind FT (fully tempered where shown in the Drawings). 3. Performance Characteristics: Visible light transmittance of 59-60 percent, summer daytime U-value of 0.56-0.58, winter nighttime U-value of 0.48-0.49, shading coefficient of 0.46-0.47 and outdoor reflectance of 8-10 percent. ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS AND PREFORMED GLAZING TAPES: General: Provide products of type indicated and complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials with which they will come into contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for -selection of glazing sealants and tapes which have performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation. 3. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. 4. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard solvent -free butyl-polyisobutylene formulation with a solids content of 100 percent; complying with AAMA A 804.1; in extruded tape form; non -staining and non -migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; packaged on rolls with a release paper on one side; with or without continuous spacer rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape and glass for application indicated. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, glazing sealants which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape Without Spacer Rod: a. "Chem -Tape 40"; Bostik Construction Products Div. b. "Extru-Seal"; Pecora Corp. GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 7 r l NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 C. "PTI 303" Glazing Tape; Protective Treatments, Inc. d. "Tremco 440 Tape"; Tremco Inc. 2.7. MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS: A. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of -- compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealants, 80 to 90 Shore A ,durometer hardness. D. Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions, as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size, shape and hardness recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers for application indicated. _ E. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size and hardness required to limit lateral movement (side -walking) of glass. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION: A. Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners; for -- presence and functioning of weep system; for existence of minimum required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery. -Obtain Glazier's written report listing _. conditions detrimental to performance of glazing work. Do not allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2. PREPARATION: A. Pre -Installation Meeting: At Contractor's direction, Glazier, sealant and gasket manufacturers' technical representatives., glass framing erector and other trades whose work affects glass and glazing shall meet at project site to review procedures and time schedule proposed for glazing and coordination with other work. 08800 - 8 GLASS AND GLAZING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 B. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use. 3.3. GLAZING, GENERAL: A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards. B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation. C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling -block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge which would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are located at top of opening. Remove from project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by proconstruction sealant - substrate testing. 3.4. GLAZING: A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width from each corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than 6" from corner, unless otherwise required. Set blocks in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use. B. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height), except where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant GLASS AND GLAZING 19 08800 - 9 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. C. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer. D. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. E. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. F. Tool exposed surfacesofsealants to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. 3.5. PROTECTION AND CLEANING: A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with — glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month, for build- up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence of these forms of residue, remove by method recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, ^` abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass _ by method recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 08800 10 GLASS AND GLAZING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 I SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY: A. Extent of each type of gypsum drywall construction required is indicated on Drawings. B. This Section includes the following types of gypsum board construction: 1. Steel framing members to receive gypsum board. 2. Gypsum board screw -attached to steel framing and furring members. C. Wood framing and furring are specified in the following Division 6 sections: 1. "Rough Carpentry." 1.3. SUBMITTALS: A. Product data from manufacturers for each type of product specified. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY.1194-1 1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C) . For adhesive attachment .and finishing of gypsum board maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete. C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials form drying too rapidly. — PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Bostwick Steel Framing Co. b. Dale Industries, Inc. c. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. d. Incor, Inc. e. Marino Industries Corp. f. United States Gypsum Co. -- 09250 - 2 GYPSUM DRYWALL NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 I 2. Gypsum Boards and Related Products: a. Centex American Gypsum Co. b. Domtar Gypsum Co. c. Georgia-Pacific Corp. d. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. e. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2. STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS: A. General: Drywall framing shall be in accordance with USG Folder SA-923 and as follows: 1. All studs over 14 feet high but less than 15 feet, 7 inches shall be 20 gauge. 2. All diagonal bracing over 8 feet long shall be 20 gauge. 3. All horizontal bracing over 4 feet long shall be 20 gauge. B. All connections of studs, bracing, furring, etc. shall be with 5/81, S-12 pan head screws with a minimum of four screws per connection. C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust - inhibitive paint. E. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust - inhibitive paint. F. Angle -Type Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide, formed from 0.0635 inch thick galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, Coating Designation G90, with bolted connections and 5/16 inch diameter bolts. G. Channels: Cold -rolled steel, 0.0598 inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16 inch wide flanges, protected with rust -inhibitive paint, and as follows: 1. Carrying Channels: 2 inches deep, 590 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated. 2. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inch deep, 475 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 2.3. STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS: A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. _ 3. Spacing: 16 inches on center, unless shown otherwise. B. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat-shaped,'depth and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: 1. Depth: 7/8 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated. -, C. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywall manufacturers for applications indicated. 2.4. TRIM ACCESSORIES: A. Cornerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads, edge trim and control joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 1. Material: Formed metal, plastic or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the following requirement: a. Sheet steel zinc -coated by hot -dip process. 2. Edge trim shapes indicated belowby reference to designations of Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047: a. 'ILC" Bead, unless otherwise indicated. 3. One -Piece Control Joint: Formed with-vee-shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047, with slot opening covered with removable strip. 2.5. GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS: A. General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840, and recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum 09250 - 4 GYPSUM DRYWALL r.. 4 i NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 rboard and joint treatment materials for the application indicated. ^ B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use pressure sensitive or staple -attached open -weave glass fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. C. Setting -Type Joint Compounds: Factory -prepackaged, job -mixed, chemical -hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. 1. Where setting -type joint compounds are indicated for use as taping and topping compounds, use formulation for each which develops greatest bond strength and crack resistance and is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. D. Drying -Type Joint Compounds:- Factory -prepackaged vinyl -based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready -Mix Formulation: Factory -premixed product. 2. Job -Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project site. 3. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and flanges of corner beads and edge trim. 4. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. 5. All-purpose compound formulated for use as both taping and topping compound. 2.6. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction which comply with referenced standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board. r. B. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound is recommended for laminating gypsum boards. C. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting -type joint compound of type recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frames. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral fiber blanket �•• insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 5 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing); and as follows: 1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag. E. Decorative laminate wall panel systems shall be equal to Panel Specialists, Inc. Wall panel system 310 with a fine matte Texture, color to be selected by Architect. Provide all mouldings and trim as required. 2.7. TEXTURE FINISH MATERIALS: A. Primer: Of type recommended by manufacturer of texture finish. B. Texture Coat: Manufacturer's standard product for stipple f inish . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION: A. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset hollow metal frames, cast -in -anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of drywall construction. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2. INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL: A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if none available, with"Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co. 09250 - 6 GYPSUM DRYWALL I NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement, at locations indicated below. 1. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure horizontally at ceiling perimeters or penetration of structural elements. 2. Where partition and wall framing abuts overhead structure. D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members; independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members or as indicated. 3.3. INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS: A. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible, otherwise connect to cast -in concrete inserts or other anchorage devices or fasteners as required. 1. Do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs. 2. Do not attach hangers to metal roof deck. 3. Do not attach hangers to underside of concrete slabs with powder -actuated fasteners. B. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit. r C. Keep hangers and braces 2 inches clear of ducts, pipes and F conduits. D. Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard. 3.4. INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS: A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall. B. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where GYPSUM DRYWALL F 09250 - 7 u NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions,above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. C. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard. In general spacing shall not exceed 16 inches on center. E. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219 and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 3.5. APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL: A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, prior to -- gypsum board unless readily installed after board has been installed. C. Locate exposed end -butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board. D. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end -butt joints, and which avoids end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches. E. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end -butt joints or avoids them entirely where possible. At high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs. F. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more _ than 1/16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place. 09250 - 8 GYPSUM DRYWALL r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1 G. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in 1 horizontal applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered t, edges and mill -cut or field -cut ends against mill -cut or field -cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. H. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached to open (unsupported) edge of stud flange first. I. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts. J. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip just before inserting board into frame. K. Form control joints and -expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories. L. Isolate perimeter of non -load -bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. M. Where sound -rated drywall construction is indicated, seal construction at perimeters, control and expansion joints, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim, and close off sound -flanking paths around or through construction, including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings. N. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.6. METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION: A. Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows: 1. On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible. GYPSUM DRYWALL a- 09250 - 9 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 2. On partitions/walls apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints. _ 3. On partitions/walls 8'-11, or less in height apply gypsum board horizontally (perpendicular to framing); use maximum length sheets possible to minimize end joints. 4. On Z-furring members apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. B. Double -Layer Application: Install gypsum backing board for base layer and gypsum wallboard for face layer. 1. On partitions/walls apply base layer and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated, with joints of base layer over supports and face layer joints offset at least 10 inches with base -- layer joints. C. Direct -Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum board is indicated to be directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum board until fastening adhesive has set. 3.7, INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES: A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges- to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install corner beads at external corners. C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi -exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where "U° bead (semi -finishing type) is indicated. 3.8. FINISHING OF DRYWALL: A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. 09250 - 10 GYPSUM DRYWALL NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 B. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting -type joint compound. C. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated. D. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand between coats and after last coat: 3.9. APPLICATION OF TEXTURE FINISH: ^ A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and prime drywall and other surfaces in strict accordance with texture finish manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer to all surfaces to .. achieve texture finish. B. Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to drywall and other surfaces indicated to receive finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce a uniform texture matching Architect's sample without starved spots or other evidence of thin application, and free of application patterns. C. Remove any texture droppings or overspray from door frames, windows and other adjoining construction. 3.10. PROTECTION: A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, which ensures gypsum drywall construction being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL F 09250 - 11 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 FSECTION 09300 - TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Unglazed Quarry tile. 2. Stone thresholds at all Toilet room entrance doors. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: _ t" 1. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile substrates. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. C. Shop drawings indicating tile patterns and locations and widths of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. 1. Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile substrates by measuring, record measurements �. on shop drawings, and coordinate them with tile joint locations, in construction with Architect. D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tile showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of tile TILE 09300 - 1 F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 indicated. Include samples of grout and accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for verification purposes of each item listed below, prepared on samples .of size and construction indicated, products involve color and texture - variations, in sets showing full range of variations expected. 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12 inches square, mounted on plywood or hardboard backing and grouted. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required. F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to., demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, -plus other information specified. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Single -Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. 1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. 09300 - 2 TILE NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 7B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, 1 freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. r C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If despite these precautions coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove, coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup. C. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. 1.7. EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as' described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: TILE 09300 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1. 2. 3. 4. 09300 - 4 Textured, Semi -gloss Tile: a. American Olean Tile Co.,. Inc. b. Buchtal Corp. USA. c. Dal -Tile Corp. d. Florida Tile e. Metropolitan Ceramics Div.; Metropolitan Industries f. Mid -State Tile Co. g. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc. h. Summitville Tiles, Inc. i. Texeramics Inc j. Universal Ceramics, Inc. Latex -Emulsion -Based Latex -Portland Cement Mortars: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Boiardi Products Corp. c. Bostik Construction Products Div. d. Custom Building Products e C-Cure Chemical Co.- f. DAP Inca Div.; USG Corp. g. L & M Mfg. Inc. h. Laticrete International Inc. i. Mapei Corp. j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc 1. Syracuse Adhesives Co. Acrylic Emulsions for Latex -Portland Cement Grouts: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Boiardi Products Corp. c. Bostik Construction Products Div. d. Custom Building Products e. C-Cure Chemical Co. f. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. g. L & M Mfg. Inc. h. Laticrete International Inc. i. Mapei Corp. j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 1. Syracuse Adhesives Co. Chemical -Resistant, Water -Cleanable Tile Grouting Epoxies: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc. c. Bostik Construction Products Div. d. C-Cure Chemical Co. ,I- I TILE t NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 e. L & M Mfg. Inc. f. Laticrete International Inc. g. Mapei Corp. h. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. i. Summitville Tiles, Inc. j. Syracuse Adhesives Co. 5. Silicone Rubber Grouts: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Laticrete International Inc. 6. Manufacturers of Chemical -Resistant Joint Sealants: a. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals Inc. b. Pennwalt Corp. 2.2. PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard -Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated. i. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI Standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns for products of type indicated. 2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. TILE 09300 - 5 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 2.3. TILE PRODUCTS A. Textured Semi -gloss Tile: Provide square -edged flat tile complying with the following requirements: 1. Wearing Surface: Abrasive aggregate embedded in wearing surface. 2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: 8 inches by 8 inches. 3. Face: Textured, semi -gloss glaze 4. Natura Granite Series as manufactured by Florida Tile or approved equal in two colors laid in a checker board pattern 2.4. A. B. 2.5. A. SETTING MATERIALS Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composition as follows: 1. Latex additive (water emulsion) of type described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, combined at job site with prepackaged dry mortar mix supplied or specified by latex additive manufacturer. a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Prepackaged dry mortar mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate, and the following dry polymer additive in the form of a reemulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site. a. Dry Polymer Additive: Manufacturer's standard Organic Adhesive: Ansi A136.1, Type I. GROUTING MATERIALS Latex -Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated, composition as follows: 1. Latex additive (water emulsion) serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, added at job site with dry grout mixture, with type of latex and dry grout mix as follows: a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard. 09300 - 6 _: TILE Ma NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 F1 19 b. Dry Grout Mixture: Dry -set grout specified or supplied by latex additive manufacturer. Use latex additive without retarder with dry -set grout. 1) Application: Use commercial portland cement grout combined with latex additive for grouting joints in floor tile unless otherwise indicated. 2.6. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Metal Edge Strips: Zinc alloy or stainless steel terrazzo strips, 1/8-inch wide at top edge with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate unless otherwise indicated. B. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout, is compatible with tile and mortar/grout products, and is easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined, tasteless, odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 deg F (49 deg C) to 140 deg F (60 deg C) per ASTM D 87. 2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as a temporary protective coating for tile. C. Stone thresholds at Toilet room entrance door shall be marble in color(s) as selected by the Architect in the profile as shown in the Drawings with a sandblast finish. 2.7. MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. TILE 09300 - 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and r similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2. PREPARATION A. Blending for tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample =- submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before -� installing. 3.3. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and.grouting materials and methods indicated. -a B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at f` 09300 - 8 TILE r• i, i NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern ' or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in cheker board grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown. F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant - filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles. F3.4. FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS: A. Textured, Semi -gloss Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for setting -bed method, TCA installation method related to type of subfloor construction, and grout type: 1. Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1. a. Bond Coat: Portland cement paste or dust coat on plastic bed or the following thin -set mortar on cured bed, ANSI A108.5, at Contractor's option: 1) Latex-portland cement mortar. b. Concrete Subfloor, Interior: TCA F112 (bonded). c. Grout: Latex-portland cement. TILE 09300 - 9 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 B. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at all toilet doors, set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish. 3.5. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. -- 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.` END OF SECTION 09300 r. 09300 - 10 TILE t: NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 FSECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUMMARY: A. Extent of each type of acoustical ceiling is shown and scheduled on drawings. B. Types of acoustical ceilings specified in this section include the following: 1. Acoustical panel ceilings, exposed suspension. 1.3. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system required. +" B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following: �1 1. 6" square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern and color. C. Certificates: Submit certificates from manufacturers of acoustical ceiling units and suspension systems attesting that their products comply with specification requirements. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other work supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system components (if any), and partition system (if any). ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes. B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings -- until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 1.7. EXTRA MATERIALS: A.. Deliver extra materials, to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 5.0t of amount installed. 2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed component equal to 5.0% of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the -- work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. USG Interiors, Inc. 09510 - 2 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 1 F NORTHWEST"BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 F2.2. ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS A. Type "A" Ceilings (#41): 1. Equal to USG #56705 Natural Fissured 11211. 2. Edge Square 3. Size - 2' x 4' x 5/8" 4. Pattern - 5. Color - White 6. Suspension grid - Equal to USG Donn DX 15 / 16 " grid. B. Type "B" Ceilings (#2) 1. Equal to USG Lay -in Panel #3270 2. Edge - Square 3. Size - 2' x 4' x 1/211 4. Pattern - 5. Color - White 6. Suspension Grid - Equal to USG Donn AX 15/16" grid and stainless steel hold down clips. Verify with j' grid manufacturer the appropriateness of the (( suspension system with the outdoor condition/ application. 2.3. METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL: A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated which comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. r B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory - applied finish for type of system indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. 1. Powder -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: fastener , system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attachment of hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing laboratory. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS F 09510 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 D. Wire for Hangers and Ties: soft temper. ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, 1. Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct -Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch diameter (12 gage). E. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit type edge detail and suspension system indicated. F. Hold-down Clips for Non -fire -rated Ceilings: For interior ceilings composed of lay -in panels weighing less than 11b. per sq. ft., provide hold-down clips spaced 2' -0" o . c . on all cross tees and/or as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.4. NON -FIRE -RESISTANCE -RATED DIRECT -HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS: A. Wide -Face Capped Double -Web Steel Suspension System equal to USG DONN DX: I Main and cross -runners roll - formed from prepainted or electrolytic zinc -coated cold rolled steel sheet, with prefinished 15/16-inch wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows: 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -Duty System. 2. End Condition of Cross -Runners: Override (stepped) type. 3. Cross -Runners: Same height as main runner. 4. Cap Material and FInish: Steel sheet with painted finish to match color of acoustical unit. Use at Type A. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified int this and other sections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 09510 - 4 1 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 Flo 3.2. PREPARATION: 1. A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less -than -half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans wherever possible. Notify Architect when lay -out of reflected ceiling plan cannot be obtained as indicated before proceeding with work. 3.3. INSTALLATION: A. General: Install acoustical ceiling systems to comply with installation standard referenced below, per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook". 1. Standard for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: Comply with ASTM C 636. B. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally -patterned units in manner shown by reflected ceiling plans. C. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers not less than 6" from each end and spaced 4' 0" along each carrying channel or direct -hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-011. 1. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye -screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. 2. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum which are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal force by bracing, countersplaying or other equally effective means. D. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. 1. Sealant Bed: Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant, concealed on back of vertical leg before installing moldings. 2. Screw -attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16" o.c. and not more than 3" from ends, leveling with ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 5 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-011. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. E. -Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. -' 1. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, and in areas where required by governing regulations or for fire - resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or required. 3.4. CLEANING: A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09510 09510 - 6 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING f. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on drawings and in schedules. 1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring and accessories as produced by -a single manufacturer, including_._ recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds. B. Installer's Qualifications: Engage Installer who is certified in writing by resilient flooring manufacturer as qualified for installation of sheet vinyl employing heat welded seams. 1.4. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of resilient flooring and accessory. B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's standard color charts in form of actual sections of resilient flooring, including accessories, showing full range of colors and patterns available, for each type of resilient flooring required. C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended maintenance practices for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required. 1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 than 48 hours after installation. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) in areas where work is completed. B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other -- finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until the latter have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by resilient flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturers of Vinyl Composition Tile: a. Amtico Flooring Div.,American Biltrite Inc. b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. c. Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Industries, Inc. d. Kentile Floors, Inc. e. Tarkett Inc. 2. Manufacturers of. Vinyl Wall Base: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Industries, Inc. c. Flexco Div., Textile Rubber Co. ._ d. Johnson Rubber Co., Inc. e. Kentile Floors, Inc. f. Mercer Plastics Co., Inc. g. Vinyl Plastics Inc. 2.2. RESILIENT FLOORING COLORS AND PATTERNS: A. Provide colors and patterns as indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturers standards. 09650 - 2 RESILIENT FLOORING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 4 2.3. TILE FLOORING: e A. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type IV; 12" x 12" unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Composition 1 - asbestos -free. 2. Gage: 1/811. 2.4. ACCESSORIES: A. Vinyl Wall Base: Provide vinyl base complying with FS SS-W- 40, Type II, with matching end stops and preformed or molded corner units, 4 inches high, from standard colors. Use premolded corners. Units to be cove, set -on type. B. Resilient Edge Strips: 1/8" thick, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, color to match flooring, or as selected by Architect from standard colors available; not less than 1" wide. C. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions. D. Concrete Slab Primer: Non -staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. E. Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION il 3.1. INSPECTION: A. Require Installer to inspect subfloor surfaces to determine that they are satisfactory. A satisfactory subfloor surface is defined as one that is smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, coatings preventing adhesive bond, and other defects impairing performance or appearance. ,. B. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine if surfaces are sufficiently cured and dry as well f as to ascertain presence of curing compounds. C. Do not allow resilient flooring work to proceed until subfloor surfaces are satisfactory. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3.2. PREPARATION: A. Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows: 1. Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for filling small cracks, holes and depressions in subfloors. 2. Remove coatings from subfloor surfaces that would prevent adhesive bond, including curing compounds incompatible with resilient flooring adhesives, paint, oils, waxes and ^, sealers. B. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor. C. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. 3.3. INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Install resilient flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Extend resilient flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings B. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring to permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, outlets and permanent columns, walls and partitions. C. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other -- non-permanent marking device. D. Install resilient flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and other such items occurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed in these covers. Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. E. Tightly, cement resilient flooring to subbase without open -- cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. Hand roll resilient flooring at perimeter of each covered area ^ -to assure adhesion. 09650 - 4 RESILIENT FLOORING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3.4. INSTALLATION OF TILE FLOORS: 1.: A. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 the at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis, unless otherwise shown. B. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged if so numbered. r Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tile are not acceptable. 1. Lay tile with grain running in one direction. C. Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with flooring manufacturer's directions. 3.5. INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES: A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. 1. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. B. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edging strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed. 3.6. CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. Perform following operations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring. 1. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 2. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer has elapsed to allow resilient flooring to become well -sealed in adhesive. 3. Damp -mop floor being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 5 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 4. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using appropriate cleaner recommended by resilient flooring manufacturers. B. Protect flooring against damage during construction period to comply with resilient flooring manufacturer's directions. 1,. Apply protective floor polish to resilient flooring surfaces free from soil, excess adhesive or surface blemishes. Use commercially available metal cross -linked acrylic product acceptable to resilient flooring manufacturer. 2. Protect resilient flooring against damage from rolling loads for initial period following installation by covering with plywood or hardboard. Use dollies to move stationary equipment or furnishings across floors. 3. Cover resilient flooring with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for substantial completion. C. Clean resilient flooring prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Clean resilient flooring by method recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. 1. Strip protective floor polish, which was applied after completion of installation, prior to cleaning. 3.7. EXTRA STOCK: A. Deliver stock of maintenance materials to owner. Furnish maintenance materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed and enclosed in protective packaging with appropriate identifying labels. 1. Tile Flooring: Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, for each type, color, pattern and size installed. END OF SECTION 09650 09650 - 6 RESILIENT FLOORING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 r 1. F F SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. Extent, location and details of each type of carpeting are indicated on drawings, carpet data sheets and in schedule. B. Work of this section includes furnishings and installation of carpeting, adhesives and accessories. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of carpet material and installation accessory required. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and flame resistance characteristics. B. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard size, showing full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualification: Firm (material producer) with not less than 15 years of production experience, whose published literature clearly indicates general compliance of products with requirements of this section. B. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in carpet installation with not less than 10 years of experience in installation of carpeting similar to that required for this project. C. Single Scource Responsibility: Provide material produced by a single manufacturer for each carpet type. CARPET 09680-1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1.5. TESTING A. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports evidencing compliance with specifications. 1. Flammability: As follows: a. Rating: Passing Methenamine Pill Test. b. Test Method: ASTM D 2859. 2. Critical Radiant Flux: As follows: �. a. Rating: Not less than 0.45 watts per sq. centimeter b. Test Method: ASTM E 648 3. Smoke Density: As follows: a. Rating: With flame, 15.4 minimum value. Without flame, -- 9.1 minimum value. b. Test Method: ASTM E 662 B. Physical Properties: Provide carpeting that is identical to Y that tested. 1. Fade Resistance: As follows: a. Rating: Maximum grey scale factor of 40 hours.' b. Test Method: AATCC 16E -- 2. Static Resistance: a. Rating: Less than 3.0 KV when tested at 20% R.H/70 deg F. b. Test Method: AATCC 134 1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. B. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 68 deg F (20 deg C) at least three days prior to and during installation in area where materials are stored. 09680-2 CARPET NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 r, 1.7. PROJECT CONDITIONS t A. Substrate Conditions: No condensation within 48 hours on underside of 4-foot by 4-foot polyethylene sheet, fully taped at perimeter to substrate. B. Substrate Conditions: pH of 9 or less when substrate wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper applied. 1.8. EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full width for each type of material equal to 5 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturer's offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, the following: 1. Lowes Carpet Corporation - Colourcopia OR prior -approved equal. 2.2. ACCESSORIES A. Carpet Edge Guard: Extruded or molded heavy-duty vinyl or rubber of size and profile indicated; minimum 2-inch-wide anchorage flange; manufacturer's standard colors. B. Seaming Cement: Hot -melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. CARPET 09680-3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. PREPARATION A. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from concrete surfaces to receive carpet; apply sealer to prevent dusting. B. Patch holes and level to a smooth surface. If previous finish chemically stripped, reseal concrete. Seal powdery or porous surfaces with sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer. 3.2. INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position; do not place seams perpendicular to door frame, in direction of traffic through doorway. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet. B. Extend carpet under removable flanges and furnishings and into alcoves and closets of each space C.. Provide cutouts where required, and bind cut edges where not _ concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. D. Fit sections of carpet prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butt cuts with seaming cement. E. Apply manufacturer's recommended adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt edges tight to form seams without gaps. Roll entire area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. 3.3. CLEANING A. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with commercial machine with face -beater element. Remove soil. Replace carpet where soil cannot be removed. Remove protruding face yarn. 3.4. PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to ensure carpet is not damaged or deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09680 09680-4 CARPET NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 F C I SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2. SUMMARY A,. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules," except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory -finished components: a. Metal toilet enclosures. b. Acoustic materials. 2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following generally inaccessible areas: PAINTING a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Utility tunnels. d. Pipe spaces. e. Duct shafts. 09900 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze. f. Brass. 4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment such as the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code -required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 3. Division S Section "Steel Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturers technical information, label analysis, and application instructions for each material proposed for use. 1. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. B. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts. 1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. 09900 - 2 PAINTING r f NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 C. Samples for verification purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. Define each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture r-• are achieved. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified. C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products named are required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers. 1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type) . 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Thinning instructions. 5. Application instructions. 6. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. ! PAINTING 09900 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.6. JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.1. MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: -� 1. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. The.Glidden Company (Glidden). 3. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). 4. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (Pittsburgh). 5. Pratt and Lambert (P & L). 6. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W). 2.2. MASONRY BLOCK FILLER A. Use on all exposed CMU except acoustical block. 09900 - 4 PAINTING r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 B. High -Performance Latex Block Filler: Heavy-duty latex block fillers used for filling open textured interior and exterior concrete masonry block before application of top coats: 1. Devoe: 2. Glidden: 3. Moore: 4. Pittsburgh: 5. P & L: 6. S-W: 2.3. PRIMERS 52901 Bloxfil Acrylic Latex Block Filler. 5317 Ultra -Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler. Moorcraft Block Filler #145. 6-7 Latex Masonry Block Filler. Pro -Hide Plus Block Filler. Heavy -Duty Block Filler B42W46. A. Interior Flat Latex -Based Paint: Flat latex paint used as a primer over concrete and masonry under alkyd flat and semigloss enamel: 1. Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. 2. Glidden: 5300 Ultra -Hide Flat Wall Paint. 3. Moore: Moore's-Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. 4. Pittsburgh: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. 5. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 6. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Flat B30W200. B. Latex -Based Interior White Primer: Latex -based primer coating used on interior gypsum drywall under a flat latex paint or L an alkyd semigloss enamel. 1. Devoe: 50801 Wonder -Tones Latex Primer and Sealer. 2. Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer. 3. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-2 Quick -Dry Latex Primer Sealer. 5. P & L: Latex Wall Primer Z30001. 6. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. C. Synthetic, Rust -Inhibiting Primer: Quick -drying, rust - inhibiting primer for priming ferrous metal on'the exterior under full -gloss and flat alkyd enamel and on the interior under flat latex paint or odorless alkyd semigloss or alkyd gloss enamels: 1. Devoe: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red. 2. Glidden: 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast -Dry Metal Primer. 3. Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust -Inhibitive Paint #163. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer. 5. P & L: Effecto Rust -Inhibiting Primer. PAINTING 09900 - 5 I 11 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 6. S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1. D. Galvanized Metal Primer: Primer used to prime interior and exterior zinc -coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. Devoe: 13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer. 2. Glidden: 5229 Glid-Guard All -Purpose Metal Primer. 3. Moore: Ironclad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer. 5. S-W: Galvite B50W3. 2.4. UNDERCOAT MATERIALS A. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready -mixed enamel for use on the interior as an undercoat over a primer on concrete or masonry under an odorless semigloss enamel: 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. 3. Moore: Moore's-Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. 5. P & L: E6 Enamel Undercoater. 6. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. 2.5. EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Alkyd Gloss Enamel: Weather -resistant, air -drying, high gloss enamel for use on the exterior over prime -coated wood: 1. Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. 2. Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. 3. Moore: Impervo High -Gloss Enamel #133. 4. Pittsburgh: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel. 5. P & L: Effecto Enamel. 6. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. B. Alkyd Gloss Enamel: Weather -resistant high -gloss enamel for use over primed ferrous metal surfaces: 1. Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. 2. Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. 3. Moore: Impervo High -Gloss Enamel #133. 4. Pittsburgh: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel. 09900 - 6 -PAINTING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 r r F 5. P & L: Effecto Enamel. 6. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. C. Lusterless Alkyd Enamel: Alkyd base flat enamel for use over prime -coated ferrous metal: 1. Devoe: 56400 De-Vo-Ko Lo-Lustre Alkyd H.P. 2. Moore: Moore's PentaFlex Flat House Paint #114. 3. Pittsburgh: 50-52 Snolite Exterior Alkyd Flat House Paint. 4. S-W: Pro -Mar Alkyd Flat Exterior Finish B38 Series. D. Alkyd Gloss Enamel: Weather -resistant high -gloss enamel for use over primed, zinc -coated (galvanized) metal surfaces and aluminum: 1. Devoe: 2. Glidden: 3. Moore: 4. Pittsburgh: 5. P & L: 6. S-W: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. 4500-Line Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. Impervo High -Gloss Enamel #133. 54 Line -Quick -Dry Enamel. Effecto Enamel. Metalastic II Enamel B-53 Series. 2.6. INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel: Low -odor, semigloss, alkyd enamel for use over a primer and undercoat on concrete, masonry (including concrete masonry block), plaster, wood, and hardboard and both ferrous and zinc -coated (galvanized) metal surfaces and over a primer on gypsum drywall:, 1. Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 2. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 3. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. 4. Pittsburgh: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 5. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 6. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates.and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PAINTING 09900 - 7 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular _ area. 3.2. PREPARATION A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place that are not to be painted, or provide surface - applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or, area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved 1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove _oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted.surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted -' in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing of problems anticipated with using the specified finish -coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral -fiber -reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast -cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. 09900 - 8 PAINTING E NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and r dust off. a. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. b. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean nongalvani zed ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with t t recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. a. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non - t petroleum -based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. i 3.3. APPLICATION A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules." 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the -application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as r recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between F applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. PAINTING 09900 - 9 F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 4. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show.through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable 'equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint. 8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed -surfaces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field- finished casework to match exterior. 10. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 12. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop -primed and touch up painted. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwiseprepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent — surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit — proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by.the manufacturer. E. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. 09900 - 10 PAINTING I NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 F F F . Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. G. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. H. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in -compliance with specified requirements. 3.4. CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping, Fli, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5. PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide "wet paint" signs to �^ Remove temporary protective protection of their work operations. PAINTING protect newly painted finishes. wrappings provided by others for after completion of painting 09900 - 11 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6. EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE .A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various '- substrates indicated. B. Concrete: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Acrylic Finish: Two coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. First and Second Coats: Exterior acrylic emulsion. 1. Devoe: 15XX Wonder -Shield Exterior Acrylic _-- Latex Flat House Paint. 2. Fuller: 262-XX 100� Acrylic Exterior Flat Finish. 3. Glidden: 3525 Spred Glide -On. 4. Moore: Moore's Flat Exterior Latex Masonry & House Paint #105. 5. PPG: 72 Line Sun Proof Acrylic Latex House Paint #105. 6. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat House Paint. 7. S-W: A-100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior — Finish A-6 Series. C. Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop -primed items. 1. Full -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Synthetic rust -inhibiting primer. — 1. Devoe: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red. 2. Fuller: 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer. 3. Glidden: 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast -Dry Metal Primer. 4. Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint #163. 5. PPG: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer. 6. P & L: Effecto Rust Inhibiting Primer. �- 7. S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1. b. First and Second Coats: Gloss alkyd enamel. 1. Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd - Urethane Gloss Enamel. 09900 - 12 PAINTING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 2. Fuller: 312-XX EPA Compliant Heavy Duty Enamel. 3. Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. 4. Moore: Impervo High -Gloss Enamel #133. 5. PPG: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel. 6. P & L: Effecto Enamel. 7. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. D. Zinc -Coated Metal: 1. High -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer. 1. Devoe: 13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer. 2. Fuller: 621-05 Blox-Rust Latex Metal Primer. 3. Glidden: 5229 Glid Guard All Purpose Metal Primer. 4. Moore: Ironclad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155. 5. PPG: 6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer. 6. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 7. S-W: Galvite B50W3 b. First and Second Coats: Gloss alkyd enamel. 1. Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd - Urethane Gloss Enamel. 2. Fuller: 312-XX EPA Compliant Heavy Duty Enamel. 3. Glidden: 4500-Line Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. 4. Moore: Impervo High -Gloss Enamel #133. 5. PPG: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel. 6. P & L: Effecto Enamel. 7. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. 3.7. INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. B. Concrete 1. Lusterless (Flat) Acryllic Finish: Two Coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. PAINTING 7 09900 - 13 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 a. First and Second Coats: Exterior Acrylic emulsion. 1. Devoe: 15xx Wonder -Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint. 2. Fuller: 262-XX 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat Finish. 3. Glidden: 3525 Spred Glide -On. 4. Moore: Moore's Flat Exterior Latex Masonry & House Paint #105. 5. PPG: 72 Line Sun -Proof Acrylic Latex House Paint. 6. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat House Paint. 7. S-W: A-100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish A-6 Series. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Semigloss, Alkyd, Enamel Finish: Two coats over filled surface with 'total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat. a. Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler. 1. Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil Acrylic Latex Block Filler. 2. Fuller: 280-00 Interior / Exterior Latex Block Filler. 3. Glidden: 5317 Ultra -Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler. 4. Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler # 173. \ 5. PPG: 6-7 Latex Masonry Block Filler. — 6. P & L: Pro -Hide Plus Block Filler. 7. S-W: Heavy -Duty Block Filler B42W46. b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel r Undercoat. 3. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. 4. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 5. PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. 6. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 7. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer 528W200. 09900 - 14 PAINTING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 c. Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel. 1. Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 2. Fuller: 110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 3. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 4. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235 5. PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. D. Gypsum Drywall Systems: 1. Odorless Semigloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: Three coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: White, interior, latex -based primer. 1. Devoe: 50801 Wonder -Tones Latex Primer and Sealer. 2. Fuller: Pro -Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer and Sealer. 3. Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer. 4. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. 5. PPG: 6-2 Quick -Dry Latex Primer Sealer. 6. P & L: Latex Wall Primer Z30001. 7. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel. 1. Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 2. Fuller: 110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 3. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 4. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. 5. PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. E. Woodwork and Hardboard: 1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Three coats. a. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. PAINTING 09900 - 15 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3. Glidden: 310 Glidden Wood Undercoat. 4. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 5. PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. 6. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 7. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200. _ b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel. 1. Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 2. Fuller: 11OXX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 3. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 4. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. 5. PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. F. Stained Woodwork 1. Stained -Varnish Rubbed Finish: Three finish coats over stain plus filler on open -grain wood. Wipe filler before applying first varnish coat. a. Stain Coat: Oil -type interior wood stain. 1. Devoe: 96XX Wonder Woodstain Alkyd Stain. y 2. Fuller: 640-XX Pen -Chrome Interior Oil'Base Wood Stain. 3. Glidden: 1600 Woodmaster Oil Stain. 4. Moore: 241 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick Drying Sanding Sealer. 5. "PPG: 77-302 Rez Medium Tint Base. 6. P & L: S-Series Tonetic Wood Stain. 7. S-W: Oil Stain A-48 Series. _ b. First Coat: Cut shellac. 1. Devoe: 4900 Wonder Woodsealer Quick -Dry Sealer. 2. Glidden: 5035 Ultra -Hide Sanding Sealer. 3. Moore: 413, Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick -Dry Sanding Sealer. 4. PPG: 77-30 Quick Drying Sanding Sealer. 5. S-W: Pro -Mar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3. -- 09900 - 16 PAINTING NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 c. Filler Coat: Paste wood filler. 1. Devoe: 4800 Wonder Woodsealer Quick -Dry Sealer. 2. Fuller: 680-00 Pen Chrome Paste Wood Filler. 3. Glidden: Glidden Paste Wood Filler. 4. Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler #238. 5. PPG: (none required) 6. S-W: Sher -Wood Fast -Dry Filler. d. Second and Third Coats: Oil rubbing varnish. 1. Devoe: 4600 Wonder Wood Satin Alkyd Satin Varnish. 2. Fuller: 653-01 EPA Compliant Clear Polyurethane Satin Finish. 3. Glidden: 82 Woodmaster Satin Sheen Urethane Varnish. 4. Moore: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404. 5. PPG: 77-7 Rez Satin Varnish. 6. P & L: Clear Finish Gloss. 7. S-W: Oil Base Varnish, Gloss A66V91. G. Ferrous Metal: 1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Two Coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Synthetic, quick -drying, rust inhibiting primer. 1. Devoe: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red. 2. Fuller: 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer. 3. Glidden: 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast -Dry Metal Primer. 4. Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust -Inhibitive Paint #163. 5. PPG: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer. 6. P & L: Effecto Rust -Inhibiting Primer. 7. S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1. b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. 4. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. PAINTING 09900 - 17 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 5. PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. 6. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 7. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200. c. Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel. 1. Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. _ 2. Fuller: 11OXX . Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 3. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 4. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. _ 5. PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 -- Series. H. Zinc -Coated Metal: 1. Semigloss Finish: Two -coats over primer, with total dry film thickness -not less than 2.5 mils. ti a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer. 1. Devoe: 13201 Mirrolace Galvanized Metal -- Primer. 2. Fuller: 621-05 Blox-Rust Latex Metal Primer. 3. Glidden: 5229 Glid-Guard All Purpose Metal Primer. 4. Moore: Ironclad Galvanizes Metal Latex Primer #155. 5. PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. ._ b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. -� 4. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. END OF SECTION 09900 09900 - 18 PAINTING E NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 } SECTION 09950 - WALL COVERINGS. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl wall covering. B. Prime coats for substrates are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame resistance characteristics. C. Shop drawings showing location and, extent of each wall covering type. Indicate termination points. D. Samples for initial selection purposes of each type of wall covering required, in manufacturers standard sizes showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. E. Product certificates signed by wall covering manufacturer certifying materials furnished comply with specified requirements. F. Maintenance data for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining wall covering. 2. Precautions for use of cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE ._. A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify wall coverings with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. 1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a constant temperature not less than 60 deg F (16 deg C) in installation areas for at least 10 days before and 10 days after installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. WALL COVERING MATERIALS A. Refer to Wall Covering Schedule at the end of this Section. Data sheet specifies manufacturer, style, color(s), pattern, size, and related requirements for wall covering materials. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, wall coverings that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in Wall Covering Schedule. -- 2.2. ADHESIVES r A. General: Manufacturers standard for use with specific wall covering and substrate application. ` B. Characteristics: Mildew -resistant, nonstaining, and strippable. 09950-2 WALL COVERINGS _ NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. PREPARATION A. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. B. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for surface preparation. 1. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 2. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 3. Metals: If not factory -primed, clean and apply rust inhibitive zinc primer. 4. Prime new gypsum board with a recommended primer. C. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semi -gloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. D. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall covering manufacturer. Form smooth wrinkle -free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall covering installation until wall liner has dried. 3.2. INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation. B. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps. C. Match pattern 6 feet above finish floor. D. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners. No horizontal seams, except where a change in vinyl color occurs due to pattern shown in the Drawings. E. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. F. Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt seams. G. Install metal moldings in longest practical lengths. Adhere to substrate. Butt end joints and miter corners. WALL COVERINGS 09950-3 F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3.3. CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended by the wall covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. 3.4. WALL COVERING SCHEDULE A. Wall covering Type: Vinyl Wallcovering 1. Shall meet Fed. Spec. CCC-W-408A for Type II and shall contain mildew and germicidal additives. 2. Shall meet CFFA-W-101-A quality standard for vinyl -coated fabric wallcoverings. — B. Manufacturer: Guard Contract Wall Coverings by Wall Covering Industries C. Style: Beachstone D. Color: To be selected by Architect - up to three colors may be used in one room, one field color and two accent colors. E. Applied Backing Material: Osnaburg F. Width: 54 inches G. Weight: 20 oz. per lineal yd. H. Fire Hazard Class: Class A END OF SECTION 09950 09950-4 WALL COVERINGS _ 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 7 SECTION 10160 - TOILET PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUMMARY: A. Extent of toilet partitions is indicated on drawings. B. Types of toilet compartments include: 1. Metal -- baked enamel finish. 2. Note that construction shall conform to ADA Regulations where indicated. 1.3. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data for materials, fabrication, and installation, including catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fastenings, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet partition assemblies not fully described by product drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorage devices built into other work. C. Samples: Submit full range of color samples for each type of two unit required. Submit 6" square samples of each color and finish on same substrate to be used in work, for color verification after selections have been made. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for adjustments within specified tolerances where ever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. TOILET PARTITIONS F 10160 - 1 t NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work for installation of toilet partitions and related work; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. PART 2 - PRODUCTS -- 2.1. MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Accurate Partitions Div., United States Gypsum Co. 2. American Sanitary Partition Corp. 3. Global Steel Products Corp. 4. Sanymetal Products Co. S. Weis-Robart Partitions, Inc. 2.2. MATERIALS: A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit • pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. B. Steel Sheets for Baked Enamel Finish: ASTM A 591, Class C, galvanized-bonderized, of following minimum thicknesses. 1. Pilasters (overhead -braced): 20 gage. 2. Pilasters (unbraced): 16 gage. 3. Panels and Screens: 20 gage. 4. Doors: 22 gage. C. Concealed Anchorage Reinforcement: Minimum 12-gage galvanized steel sheet. D. Concealed Tapping Reinforcement: Minimum 14-gage galvanized steel sheet. E. Core Material for Metal Partitions: Manufacturers standard sound -deadening honey comb of impregnated Kraft paper, in thickness to provide finished dimension of V, minimum for doors, panels, and screens, 1-1/411 minimum for pilasters. 10160 - 2 TOILET PARTITIONS PW NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 F. Brackets: Manufacturer's design for attaching panels to walls and pilasters, shall be full height, continuous brackets. G. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy- duty operating hardware and accessories of chromium - plated non-ferrous cast alloy P Zamac") . In lieu of manufacturer's standard hinges, provide continuous stainless steel hinges equal to Model FS-902 as manufactured by MARKAR Products, Inc. All toilet partition doors shall have surface mounted latches. H. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, chromium -plated steel,'or brass finished to match hardware, with theft -resistant type heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip galvanized, cadmium -plated, or other rust -resistant protective -coated steel. 2.3. FABRICATION: A. General: Furnish standard doors, unless otherwise indicated. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to receive partition -mounted hardware, accessories, as indicated. B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24" wide inswinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 36" wide outswinging doors at stalls equipped for use by handicapped. 2.4. FINISHES: A. Baked Enamel Finish: 1. Clean galvanized steel surfaces after fabrication and before application of enamel coating system, to remove processing compounds, oils, and other contaminants. 2. Prime metal with baked -on rust inhibitive primer. 3. Apply two coats of thermosetting enamel finish, applied by electrostatic process, and baked in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. 4. Colors: Two of manufacturer's standard colors in each room, as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION: TOILET PARTITIONS 10160 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. B. Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are parallel with overhead -brace when doors are in closed position. 3.2. ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on inswing and outswinging doors to return to fully closed position. B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of — construction period. END OF SECTION 10160 10160 - 4 TOILET PARTITIONS r l NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 7 SECTION 10500 - METAL LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes metal lockers and related equipment as indicated on drawings. B. Types of products in this section include the following: 1. Standard wardrobe lockers. Type 'A': 1211 x 12" x 72" single tier 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division Specification sections. B. Product data and installation instructions for metal locker units. C. Color Samples on squares of same metal to be used for fabrication of lockers. D. Shop Drawings that show metal lockers in dimensioned relation to adjacent surfaces. Show lockers in detail, method of installation, fillers, trim, base, and accessories. Include locker numbering sequence information. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Uniformity: Provide metal lockers that are standard products of single manufacturer, with interchangeable like parts. Include necessary mounting accessories, fittings, and fastenings. 1.5. JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver metal lockers until building is enclosed and ready for locker installation. Protect from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation. METAL LOCKERS 10500 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements furnish lockers by one of the following: manufacturers: 1. The Interior Steel Equipment Co. 2. Lyon Metal Products 3. Medart Inc. 4. Penco Products Inc. 5. Republic Storage Systems 2.2. MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: Mild cold -rolled and leveled furniture steel, free from buckle, scale, and surface imperfections. B. Expanded Metal: 3/4-inch mesh flattened carbon steel. C. Fasteners: Cadmium, zinc, or nickel -plated steel; exposed bolt heads, slotless type; self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts. D. Equipment: Hooks and hang rods of cadmium -plated or zinc - plated steel. 2.3. FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Construction: Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch. Weld frame members together to form rigid, one-piece structure. Weld, bolt, or -- rivet other joints and connections. Grind exposed welds flush. Do not expose bolts or rivet heads on fronts of locker doors or frames. _ B. Frames: Fabricate of 16-gage channels or 12-gage angles, minimum, with continuous stop/strike formed on vertical members. C. Finishing: Chemically pretreat metal with degreasing and phosphatizing process. Apply baked -on enamel finish to all surfaces, exposed and concealed, except plates and nonferrous metal. 1. Color: Provide locker units in color(s)' selected by -' Architect from manufacturers standards. Concealed parts may be manufacturers standard neutral color as selected by the Architect. 10500 - 2 METAL LOCKERS r NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 I 2.4. WARDROBE LOCKERS: Equal to Lyon Standard Locker style and as C- follows: A. Body: Fabricate back and sides of minimum 24-gage steel, with double -flanged connections extending full height. Form top and bottom of not less than 24-gage steel, with flanged edges. 1. Provide 24-gage steel sheet hat shelf in single -tier units. 2. Form exposed ends of non -recessed lockers of minimum 16- gage steel. B. Door: One-piece, minimum 16-gage sheet steel, flanged at all edges, constructed to prevent springing when opening or closing. Fabricate to swing 180 degrees. 1. Reinforcing: Provide extra bracing or reinforcing on inside of doors over 15 inches wide. 2. Ventilation: Provide stamped, louvered vents in door face, as follows: a. Single -tier lockers:- Not fewer than 6 louver openings top and bottom. 3. Hinges: Steel, full -loop, 5-knuckle, tight pin. Weld to inside of frame and secure to door with not fewer than 2 factory -installed fasteners that are completely concealed and tamperproof when door is closed. a. Provide at least 3 hinges for each door over 42 inches high; at least 2 hinges for each door 42 inches high or less. C. Recessed Handle and Latch: Housing to form recess for latch lifter and locking devices; nonprotruding latch lifter containing strike and eye for padlock; and automatic, prelocking, pry- resistant latch mechanism with latching action as follows: 1. Single -tier lockers: Not less than 3-point latching. 2.5. LOCKER ACCESSORIES A. Locking: Fabricate lockers to receive the following locking devices: 1. Handle shall accept regulation padlock. METAL LOCKERS 10500 - 3 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 B. Equipment: Furnish each locker with the following items, unless otherwise shown: 1. Single -Tier Units: Hat shelf, one double -prong hook and not fewer than 2 single -prong wall hooks. C. Number Plates: Manufacturers standard etched, embossed, or -' stamped, nonferrous metal number plates with numerals not less than 3/8 inches high. Number lockers in sequence as directed by Architect. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, �- centered, with at least 2 fasteners of same finish as number plate. D. Continuous Sloping Tops: Not fewer than 16-gage sheet steel, approximately 25 degrees pitch, in lengths as long as practicable but not less than 4 lockers. Provide closures at ends. Finish to match lockers. 1. Provide perforated separators for athletic lockers. E. Trim: Provide trim at jambs and head of recessed lockers, consisting of not less than 18-gage cold -rolled steel. Factory- finish trim to match lockers. Secure trim to lockers with concealed fastening clips. F. Filler Panels: Provide filler panels where indicated, of not — less than 18-gage steel sheet, factory fabricated and finished to match locker units. G. Provide 4-inch high "Kitchen Cabinet Style" locker bases. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Install metal lockers at locations shown in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for plumb, level, rigid, and flush installation. B. Space fastenings about 48 inches o.c., unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, and apply through backup reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal distortion, using concealed fasteners. _. C. Install trim, metal base, sloping top units, and metal filler panels and end panels, using concealed fasteners. Provide flush, hairline joints against adjacent surfaces. 10500 - 4 METAL LOCKERS NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3.2. ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices are operating properly. B. Touch up marred finishes, but replace units that cannot be restored to factory -finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10500 METAL LOCKERS 10500 - 5 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following toilet accessory items: 1. Paper towel dispenser 2. Toilet tissue dispenser 3. Grab bar 4. Soap dispenser 5. Waste receptical 6. Custodial shelf unit 7. Stainless steel framed mirror units. 8. Hand blow dryers 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. B. Product Data for each toilet accessory item specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, method of mounting, specified options, and finishes. C. Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project. D. Setting Drawings: Where cutouts are required in other work, provide templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and for installation of anchorage devices. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items. 1.6. WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written 5- year warranty against silver spoilage of mirrors, agreeing to replace any mirrors that develop visible defects within warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. PRODUCTS A. Provide accessories equal to standard units as listed herein. 1. Tissue Holder: equal to Scott Paper Company Model JRT Escort; one holder for each new water closet. 2. Liquid Soap Dispenser: equal to Bradley Model 6304-67; a. One dispenser for each new lavatory. 3. Grab Bars: a. 1-1/2" stainless steel, 18 gauge with 1-1/4" clearance in 36 inch and 42 inch lengths as shown. 4. Waste Receptical: Swing top waste receptical equal to Bradley Model 377-38. 5. Custodial Shelf Unit: Equal to Bradley Model 9934. 6. Mirrors: Stainless steel frame, 1/4" glass with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating; sizes and locations as shown on plan; equal to Bradley Model 780 - 24x36. 7. Hand blow dryers; equal to Bradley Model 2870-28. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation 4. Scott Paper Company 10800 - 2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 i PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. 3.1. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 3 FM i NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 FSECTION 10950 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. SUMMARY 1. Provide and install miscellaneous specialties as indicated on the drawings. This Section includes.: a. Fire Extinguisher b. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets c. Floor Mat Tile d. ADA Signage e. Exterior Signage f . Plaque g. Bicycle Security Rack h. Book Depository 2. Related Sections: a. 02200 EARTHWORK b. 03300 CONCRETE WORK c. 04200 UNIT MASONRY d. 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS e. 09250 GYPSUM BOARD r C. SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data for materials, fabrication, and installation, including catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fastenings, and accessories. 2. Submit full range of color samples for each type of unit required. 3. Submit 6 inch square samples of each color and finish on same j^ substrate to be used in Work, for color verification after j selections have been made. MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10950 - 1 F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Reference Standards: _ a. N.F.P.A. Regulations: (1) Comply with the latest regulations of the N.F.P.A. -' Standards and Guidelines for materials, sizes, construction, and installation. 2. Source Quality Control: a. Field Measurements: (1) Take field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. (2) Allow for adjustment within specified tolerances where taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay work. (3) Single Source Responsibility: Provide each type of miscellaneous specialty as a complete unit. Produce as single manufacturer, including all necessary mounting accessories, fittings, and fastenings. 3. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other Work for installation of related Work; -- coordinate delivery with other Work to avoid delay. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS - A. Provide UL-listed fire extinguishers of types required for each fire extinguisher cabinet (FECB) and other locations as required. B. Fire extinguisher shall bear the UL "Listing Mark" for the type, rating and classification of each extinguisher. C. The fire extinguisher located over the book depository shall be approved equal to Model 1040, with a 165 deg. fusable link, as manufactured by ADX Automatic Extinguishers or approved equal. 10950 - 2 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 7 L 2.2. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (FECB): A. Manufacturer's standard units of suitable size for housing fire extinguishers of type and capacity required, and as follows: 1. Type: Fully -Recessed: Cabinet box recessed in wall to suit trim style indicated. 2. Flat trim with Hidden Flange: Frame of cabinet box overlaps surrounding wall finish, concealed from view by overlapping door. 3. Door Material: 0.085 in. thick extruded aluminum, clear anodized in color. 4. Door Style: Flush/overlay. 5. All Fire Extinguisher Cabinets shall be equal to Larsen's Anccitectural Series with the fire rated "Flame -Shield" option for a one (1) hour wall system. B. Provide a Series 100 Bracket for wall mounting suitable for the required operation of- a fusable link operated fire extinguisher as manufactured by ADX Automatic Extinguisher that is located over the book depository. 2.3. FLOOR MAT TILE A. Floor Mat Tile shall Fluff -Cord Strip Tile Rubber Company. 2.4. ADA TACTILE SIGNAGE be equal to 12 inch x 12 inch as manufactured by R.C. Musson A. ADA wall mount Tactile Signage shall be equal to (unless shown otherwise) Thermostat "ES" Plastic as manufactured by BEST Manufacturing in colors as selected by the Architect. B. Provide signage for each automatic door operator location. 1. Provide signage equal to Model WP225 as manufactured by Best Sign Systems with a custom message located below the H.C. symbol that reads "ACCESSIBLE DOOR" in English with the comparable grade 2 braille message below the English version. C. Provide signage for the restrooms equal to WP287 (quanity 1), WP 288 (quanity 1) and WP 268A (quanity 1) as manufactured by Best Sign System. Below the text on each sign provide the comparable message in raised grade 2 braille. MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES F 10950 - 3 F NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 D. Provide two signs, each equal to Model WP 262, as manufactured by Best Signage Systems. Below the text on each sign provide the comparable message in raised grade 2 braille. E. Provide nine (9) signs, each equal to Model WP241 as manufactured by Best Signage Systems. Below the "NO SMOKING" message provide the custom message "AS PER ORDINANCE 9127". Below the custom text, provide the comparable standard and custom text in raised grade 2 braille. F. Provide three (3) 6-inch x 7-3/4-inch x 1/8-inch thick "ES" plastic signs as manufactured by BEST Signage Systems, with text as specified. Locate text similar to Best "Stock Word & Picture Signs". Below the English text, provide a comparable message in raised grade 2 braille. The text is as follows: 1. "MEETING ROOM" 2. "CHILDREN'S CENTER" 3. "STAFF WORK ROOM" 2.5. EXTERIOR SIGNAGE A. Exterior signage shall be equal to 8-inch high, upper and lower case, Group II Caslon Adbold cast letters as manufactured by OMC Industries, Inc. 1. Material: Aluminum (AA 356) 2. Finish: Anodized (AF-7) 3. Mounting Method: Flush Mounting (FM - 1) 4. Quantity: One (1) Exterior Sign comprised of 7 uppercase and 32 lowercase letters. 2.6. PLAQUE A. Plaque shall be of Aluminum ( OMC AA356) alloy and size is approximately 18 inches wide x 29 inches high. Letters shall be "Caslon 3 Roman" style with a "Pebble" textured background. Border style shall be a "Single Line -Beveled Edge". Finish shall be "Satin-PAF-3" in colors as selected by the Architect. Plaque shall be mounted on a Gypsum Board wall with blocking using a "Type D" mounting method with 1 inch diameter rosettes. 10950 - 4 1 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 F r i B. Plaque shall be equal to Cast Plaques as manufactured by OMC Industries, Inc., Bryan, Texas. C. Plaque text shall be as follows at the end of this section on page 6. D. Quantity: One (1) Plaque 2.7. BICYCLE SECURITY RACK A. Bicycle security rack shall be of heavy-duty steel pipe, hot -dipped galvanized AFTER FABRICATION equal to "THE ORIGINAL RIBBON RACK" manufactured by AAA Ribbon Rack Co. or "ORIGINAL CYCLOOPS" as manufactured by Columbia Cascade Company. Provide lengths required for a nine (9) bike capacity with an inground anchor mount. 2.8. BOOK DEPOSITORY A. Book Depository shall be equal to Model 6155D as manufactured by MOSLER with front facing frames, door and all exposed component parts of satin finished clear anodized aluminum. Standard engraved identification on the door shall be "BOOK DEPOSITORY". Housing shall be heavy guage paint grip steel, electric arc welded at the seams, ground smooth, cleaned and prime painted. PART 3. - EXECUTION 3.1. INSPECTION A. Examine substrates and adjoining surfaces before installation to insure adjacent Work has been completed. B. Prepare substrates and adjoining surfaces as required. C. Install as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Install Plaque, Exterior Signage and ADA Tactile signs where directed by the Architect. E. Install level and plumb as required. F. Isolate dissimilar materials from each other as required. G. Clean adjacent surfaces and leave in a clean condition. MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10950 - 5 7 NORTHWEST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 3.2. PLAQUE TEXT ui AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA _ BRANCH LIBRARY CITY COUNCIL CITY COUNCIL 1993 1995 DAVID R. LANGSTON. MAYOR DAVID R. LANGSTON, MAYOR M.J. "BUD' ADERTON ALPX "TY' COOKE ALEX *TY` COOKE VICTOR HERNANDEZ MAX L. INCE MAX L INCE RANDY NEUCEUAUER RANDY NEUCEBAUER T.J. PATTERSON T.J. PATTERSON MAGGIE TROD WINDY SITTON LIBRARIES BOARD RELEN UTKEN. CHAIR 1003 DR. JUDITII HOGG CARROL IIULLEY, I'I IAIH 1003 DUKE HOLMES NADINY BARTSCH CAROLYN KENNEDY ALICE C►IAVEZ DONNER SMITH CITY MANAGER BOB CASS DIRECTOR STRATEGIC PLANNING JIM BERTRAM DIRECTOR, CULTURE AND LEISURE SERVICES CAROLYN McCORMICK—ALIAMUS LIBRARY DIRECTOR JEFFREY HIPPEL ARCHITECT MWH ARCHITECTS INC. GENERAL CONTRACTOR PHARR & COMPANY 1995 END OF SECTION 10950 10950 - 6 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 1194-1 r- 1 SECTION 15000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PART I - GENERAL 1.1. CHECKING DOCUMENTS: A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. 1.2. GENERAL: A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. B. All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and electrical trades shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. C. Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required. D. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement. E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 1 1194-1 0 inserts in masonry walls while they areunder — construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. F. The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading oflines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. G. The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment -drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. H. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. J. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by 15000 - 2 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 1194-1 �., the Architect before thework is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. K. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the r chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as storm drains. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit water lines and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. L. Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. M. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications l shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. N. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. 0. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M", "P" or "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no F11 clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 3 1194-1 1.3. DIMENSIONS: A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. I.S. ELECTRICAL WIRING: B. All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. MOTORS AND CONTROLS: All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All _motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Division 16 shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls of the types specified or required. These starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics and shall provide thermal overload protection. All starters shall be standard of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. They further shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire. 15000 - 4 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 1194-1 pr- t ,. F 1.7. A. 1.8. MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL: A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be the sole judge of equality. B. The Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. C. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. 1.9. SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 5 1194-1 documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. _ C. Shop. drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. 1.10. LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES: A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority.. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions ofthework the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.11. TERMINOLOGY: A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install', and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish -and install the material. 15000 - 6 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 1194-1 r I. C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. "Concealed" areas are those areas which cannot be seen by the building occupants from the floor with all building components in place. G. "Exposed" areas are all areas which are exposed to view by the building occupants, including mechanical rooms. H. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1.12. PAINTING: A. All painting shall be done by the Contractor under Division 9. Following is a general outline of the required work for Divisions 15 and 16. 1. When the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half flat half enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all exposed gas pipe. 3. Paint all surfaces above or behind perforated return air grilles or other open spaced air outlet devices with flat black paint. All pipes, conduits, ductwork and structural members shall be painted. These surfaces shall be painted a distance away from the grille such that no unpainted surfaces are visible to a person standing on the room side and viewing through the device. 1.13. SEALING AROUND PIPES, CONDUITS, DUCTS, ETC.: A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc. shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors with Dow Corning No. 2000 fire resistant caulk. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 7 1194-1 1.14. INSTALLATION DRAWINGS: A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. 1.15. MARKING OF PIPE: A. The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. B. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Marker on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. C. Markers shall conform completely with "The Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems (ANSI A131 1981). Markers shall have ANSI specified color coded background, color of legend and legend letter size. D. Markers shall be equal to Seton Set Mark Pipe Markers. 1.16. IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING: A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. 15000 - 8 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL r 1194-1 r r B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. 1.17. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. 1.18. OPERATING MANUALS: A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. B. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Wiring diagrams. 4. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 5. Parts list for all items. G. Name and address of each vendor. 1.19. GUARANTEE: A. Unless a longer guarantee is hereinafter called for, all work, material and equipment items shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after acceptance by the Owner. All defects in labor and materials occurring during this period, as determined by the Architect, shall be repaired and/or replaced to the complete satisfaction of the Architect. Guarantee shall be in writing and in triplicate. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 9 1194-1 1.20. COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS: _ A. Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 1. Accurate record drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3 All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. END OF SECTION 15000 ~ 15000 - 10 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR.MECHANICAL,AND ELECTRICAL 1194-1 SECTION 15100 - SITE UTILITIES ' PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including r General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. ell e 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. } 1.3. SCOPE: A. Perform all layout, trenching, excavation, backfill, shoring and similar work and provide and install all materials and appurtenances necessary for the installation and final connection of all utilities. L k PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS: A. All piping materials for every purpose shall be furnished and installed as hereinafter specified. B. All pipe and fittings shall be new and unused unless specifically indicated otherwise. C. Underground steel piping shall be factory coated pipe "X-Tru-Coat" or epoxy coated pipe with fittings wrapped with a double thickness of 3M Scotch 1151" vinyl tape over pipe and fittings. 2.2. SANITARY SEWER: A. PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D3034 type PSM with i a maximum SDR of 35 with elastomeric joints complying with ASTM D3212. WATER LINES: 2.3. A. PVC Piping: PVC gasketed water pipe, ASTM D2241, SDR21. 2.4. GAS LINES: A. Plastic Gas Piping: Polyethylene, Type III, Grade 3, (PE 3406-3408), resin conforming to ASTM D1248-7A, pipe construction conforming to ASTM D2513 (SDR 11). B. Mechanical Joints: Where steel lines connect to plastic lines 2" and smaller in size, use Continental Style 5 extra heavy duty malleable iron couplings with stiffeners. SITE UTILITIES 15100 - 1 r I 1194-1 C. D. E. 2.5. Flanges: Where steel lines valves or accessories connect to plastic lines 2-1/2" and larger, use polyethylene and steel flat face flanges with full face gaskets. Casing: Encase plastic lines under streets in schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe extending 36" beyond paving. Service Risers: Wayne Manufacturing compression service riser with anode and built-in stiffener. EXTERIOR CLEANOUTS: A. Provide and install cleanouts in exterior sewer lines where shown or as required by ordinance but not greater than 100 ft. apart. Cleanouts shall consist of a concrete encased special fitting with sewer pipes extending therefrom upward, terminating in a concrete slab. A brass countersunk cleanout ferrule shall be set on this slab in such manner as to be flush with finished grade and to provide access, through its cover, to the cleanout. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the sewer, up to 6" in size, and 4" on 6" and larger sizes. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1. LAYOUT OF UTILITY LINES: A. Before starting excavation Contractor shall: 1. Uncover and determine the elevation at beginning and end terminals of each line. 2. Compute and verify depth of all lines and grade of sewer lines and submit figures in writing. 3. Stake route of each line. 4. Arrange utility connections with authorities. 5. Locate and identify any conflicting underground structures and adjust grade or routing to accommodate installation of the lines. 3.2. LAYING PIPE: A. Lay pipe to the lines and profiles required by conditions at the site and the drawings. Keep pipe trenches free of water and dry during the bedding, laying and jointing operations. Install fittings and valves at the required locations, with joints centered and with valve stems vertical. Handle pipe carefully to avoid damage to dimensioned ends. Remove pipe with damaged ends which cannot be suitably repaired. Keep interior of piping and accessories clean. r- 15100 - 2 SITE UTILITIES 1194-1 B. Proximity of Water and Sewer Lines: required by drawings, lay parallel wat lines in separate trenches at leas Insofar as possible place water line at than the sewer. Where water lines and each other, the water line shall be at the sewer, or if this is not possible, between the lines may be reduced t clearance provided the sewer line is least 10 feet on each side of the water 3.3. EXCAVATION FOR OUTSIDE UTILITIES: Unless otherwise er lines and sewer t 10 feet apart. a higher elevation sewer lines cross least 3 feet above amount of clearance 0 12" out to out cast iron for at line. A. The Contractor shall perform any excavations of every description and of whatever substances encountered, to the depths indicated on the drawings and/or required for the installation of his work. B. Trench Excavation: The trench shall be excavated to the depth required so as to provide a uniform and continuous bearing and support. There shall be no classification of or extra payment for excavated materials, and all materials encountered shall be excavated as required. C. Bury: Nonmetallic pipe shall be buried with 36" minimum cover, metallic pipe shall have minimum 24" cover. D. Bracing and Sheeting: Open -cut trenches shall be sheeted and braced as required by OSHA and the State of Texas Open Trench Act as may be necessary for the safety of the workmen or protection of property. E. Barricades and Safety Provisions: To protect persons from injury and to avoid property damage, adequate barricades, construction signs, warning lights and guards as required shall be placed and maintained during progress of the construction work. All material, piles, equipment, pipe, and open trenches that may serve as hazards to vehicular or pedestrian traffic shall be protected by barricades or fences and warning lights. 3.4. BACKFILLING: A. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and until the utilities systems as installed conform to the requirements specified hereinafter. The trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavation materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale, or other approved materials free from large clods of earth or stones deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6" layers, until the pipe has a cover of not less than one foot for water mains and two feet where possible for other lines. r SITE UTILITIES 15100 - 3 is 1194-1 B. The remainder of the backfill material shall then be thrown into the trench, moistened and tamped in one foot layers. Blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, and large boulders shall not be used as backfill material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and will be a requirement when so directed. Any trenches improperly backfilled or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled and mounded over, and smoothed off. C. Open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved shall be backfilled as specified above, except that the entire depth of the trench shall be backfilled in 6" layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density at least equal to that of the surrounding earth in such manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value, so that paving of the area can proceed immediately after backfilling is completed. Along all other portions of the trenches, the ground shall be graded to a reasonable uniformity and the mounding over the trenches left in a uniform and neat condition. 3.5. LOCATION AND DETECTION: A. Below Ground: 1. Non -Metallic: a. Non-metallic pipe installed below ground shall have installed in the same trench a detectable plastic tape that conforms in to the APWA color coding as follows: Blue - Water Green - Sewer and Sanitary Systems Yellow - Gas b. Such tape shall consist of one layer of aluminum foil laminated between two layers of inert plastic film. Tape shall be approved 2 1/8" wide and shall be imprinted with a continuous traceable for a minimum of eight years after direct burial. Product shall be Terra Tape Detectable or approved equal. Tape shall be installed per manufacturer's instructions, but no less than 12" above the buried line. 2. Metallic: a. Below ground metallic piping shall have identifying tape similar to that specified for below ground non-metallic except that the aluminum foil for location is not required. ram+ 15100 - 4 SITE UTILITIES +• PART III - EXECUTION 6 il 3.1. UTILITY SERVICES: A. Water Service: The Contractor shall secure water service from the city main as indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall make all arrangements with the city for domestic water service, including the tap, meter and meter box, and pay all charges levied by the city. Beginning at the termination of the city work, the contractor shall provide and install all water piping, fittings, valves, valve boxes, etc. shown on the drawings. Meter box shall conform to municipal requirements. B. Sanitary Sewer: The contractor shall arrange with the city for sewer service at the point shown on the drawings. Pay any charges levied by the city for this connection. C. Gas: Arrange with the gas utility company for natural gas service as shown on the drawings. From the location of the new meter, extend service to the building. Provide service valves at each service point. 3.2. TESTING: A. Sewer: Prior to testing for leakage the trench shall be backfilled up to at least the lower half of the pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed' to prevent pipe movement during testing, leaving the joints uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks encountered shall be corrected. Test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water so that a head of at least 10 feet is provided above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipe line to be tested. The filled line shall be allowed to stand not less than 4 hours. B. Water Lines: Test under hydrostatic pressure of 150 PSIG for 4 hours with no leaks and no pressure drop. m C. Gas: Before backfilling, test under air pressure at 15 PSIG for 24 hours. There shall be no pressure drop, except for correction for temperature variation. If any pressure drop occurs, soap test every joint, correct the leaks and retest. F END OF SECTION SITE UTILITIES 15100 - 5 F1194-1 SECTION 15200 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES t, PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3. SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS: A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3034, Type PSM Max. SDR = 35 PVC Soil Fittings Elastomeric ASTM D3212 Copper Tubing ASTM B75-76 Wrought Copper Solder Fittings ANSI B16.22 Steel Pipe ASTM A120, A53, A106 Butt Weld Fittings ANSI B16.9 Socket Weld Fittings ANSI B16.11 Steel Flanges ANSI B16.5 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI B16.3 C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Clear Flow fitting designed to meet requirements of ASTM F-492. C PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200 - 1 Fill 1194-1 E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, _ screwed pattern, bround joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. 2.2. VALVES: A. Swing Check Valves 2" and Smaller: All bronze screwed, equal to Crane No. 37 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 36 for pressures to-200 psi SWP or 400 PSI WOG. B. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and O-rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Valve shall be three piece break away for in -line service. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems of adequate length for the handle to clear the insulation and jacket. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Ring type two piece ball valves are not acceptable. C. Gas Valves: Iron body, lubricated plug valves equal to Nordstrom Fig. 143 in sizes 2-1/2" and larger. Valves 2" and smaller equal to Crane -No. 270 threaded gas stop. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS: A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use.no long screws or bushings. D. Install and support piping systems ,with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at,points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment 15200 - 2 PIPING AND_ACCESSORIES I 1194-1 r- items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials.- 3.2. FLASHING: A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof with sheet lead not less than 2-1/2 lbs. per square foot, built a minimum of 8" in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity. Flashing at roof drains shall be 36" square. 3.3. ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES: A. Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated. B. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls. 3.4. FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS: A. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. r PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200 - 3 W 1194-1 B. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square, ream and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with high temperature solid string or wire solder, 95%- tin, 5°s antimony, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for all copper tubing. Low temperature solder such as 50/50 or 40/60 will not be permitted. C. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1/811 per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or, grinding before depositing the next successive bead of welding. D. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be made using bolts of Grade 5 or better and gaskets as specified. Faces of the flanges shall be cleaned of all dirt, rust or other foreign matter. The pipe, valve, or fitting shall be properly aligned and free to move while bolting, and the bolts shall be gradually tightened at a uniform rate around the entire flange. No strain shall be put on the flanges in making up the joint. E. Solvent Weld Plastic Joints: Solvent welded according to manufacturers instructions. 3.5. REPAIR OF LEAKS A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. 3. Repair leaks in PVC pipe by remaking the joint. 4. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld completely through the base metal and grind smooth. Re -weld, accomplishing look penetration of the base metal. The repair weld should in no case be less than 411 in length. 15200 - 4 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 1194-1 B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. 3.6. ALIGNMENT AND GRADES: A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. END OF SECTION 15200 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200 - 5 F 1194-1 r.. F SECTION 15210 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3. SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564-67. B. Sanitary Vent Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564-67. C. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All water lines underground or under slabs on grade shall be of Type K hard drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder -joint fittings. D. Gas Lines: Schedule 40 black steel with 150 lb. banded malleable iron fittings for pipe 2" and smaller; welded fittings for pipe 2-1/2" and larger. E. Condensate Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. F. Downspouts and Interior Storm Drain Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic -pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564-67. G. Interior Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the bottom of each stack, at each change in direction, and in each horizontal run at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210 - 1 1r" f 6 1194-1 all interior soil, waste, and drain lines. Where cleanouts occur in walls of finished areas, they shall be concealed behind chrome plated access covers, such as Wade W-8480-R or provided with other special plugs and covers as required to present a finished appearance. Floor cleanouts in unfinished areas shall be Wade W-6000 with threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with cast iron plug and gasket and secured satin bronze scoriated top. Floor cleanouts in finished tile floors shall be Wade W-6000-TS with square tile top; in carpeted areas Wade W-6000-72 with carpet marker. All cleanouts shall be the same size as the line served up to 4 size and shall be 4" for all larger lines. H. Air Chambers: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 12" long and no smaller than the supply pipe, shall be provided and installed in each water supply to each and every fixture, outlet, item of equipment, etc. The length and/or the diameter of these air chambers shall be greater where required to eliminate water hammer. PDI shock absorbers may be used if sized in accordance with PDI recommendations. I. Vacuum Breakers: On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture, item of equipment, or other device which has a water supply below the rim of the fixture, or which has a threaded spout, provide and install an approved vacuum breaker. These vacuum breakers shall be designed to prevent any possible backflow through them. Where these are installed in chrome plated lines, they shall be chrome plated to match. 2.2. PLUMBING FIXTURES: A. The plate numbers on the drawings represent fixtures that will be acceptable on the job. Approved equal fixtures of American Standard, Eljer, and Kohler will be acceptable. B. All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This includes faucets, fittings, stops, risers, strainers, tailpieces, traps, waste, escutcheons, flush valves, brackets, vacuum breakers, goosenecks, hole covers, bolts, nuts and etc. C. All threaded supply fittings shall have back flow preventers. D. All fixtures shall have wheelhandle stop valves. E. Generally all wall hung fixtures shall be provided with chair carriers so that no weight is supported from the wall. F. All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance. 15210 - 2 PLUMBING SYSTEMS r 1194-1 G. Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in. H. Where fixtures mate with walls or floor, the joint shall be grouted with dental plaster, G. E. Silicone or other grout as directed by the Architect. I. The Contractor shall verify all rough in heights before installation and shall secure a current ruling on heights of handicapped fixtures before rough in to insure that they meet the requirements of the parties having jurisdiction. J. Controls for flush valves shall be mounted on the wide side of toilet areas. K. All fixtures shall meet State of Texas SB587 water saving performance standards. 2.3. PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE: Water Closet WC'A' Bowl Eljer 111-4805, 1.5GPF water Flush valve Seat Water Closet WC'B' Bowl Flush valve Seat Urinal U'A' & U'B' Fixture Flush Valve PLUMBING SYSTEMS saver, elongated bowl, siphon jet, standard height, with bolt covers. Sloan Regal 113-1.5, 16" riser. Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open front. Eljer 111-4815, 1.5GPF water saver, elongated bowl, siphon jet, handicapped 16-3/4" height, with bolt covers. ADA compliant. Sloan Regal 111, 11-1/2" riser. Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open front. Eljer 161-1150 vitreous china, siphon jet flushing action, with chair carrier and 3/411 top spud. Sloan Royal 180 15210 - 3 1194-1 Lavatory L _ Fixture Eljer 051-2954, vitreous china 22-1/2" x 18-1/2" self rim, with 4" drillings. ADA compliant. Supply 557-1122, single chrome lever -- handle aerator. Tailpiece 803-0530 perforated grid with offset drain. P-trap 804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon. Stops & Risers 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel handle -- stops. Insulation Truebro 102W insulation for p-trap, offset tailpiece, and hot and cold. S ink ' S -� Fixture Elkay LRAD-1919, 19" x 19" single compartment, 18 gage r type 302 self rimming stainless steel with 3 holes. ADA compliant. Supply Eljer 717-1700, Chrome finish swing spout single lever unit with 3/8" tubing inlets. Tailpiece Eljer 803-0530 perforated grid with offset drain. P-trap Eljer 804-1190 with tubing waste and escutcheon. Stops, risers Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel handle stops. -- Insulation Truebro 102W insulation for p-trap, offset tailpiece, and hot and cold. 15210 - 4 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 1194-1 Electric Water Cooler EWC Fixture P-trap Stop Mop Basin MB Fixture Supply Wall Hydrant WH Fixture Roof Drain RD Elkay EBFATL-8 for the handicapped with stainless steel receptor and enamel cabinet with LKAPR-188 apron. ADA compliant. Eljer 804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon. Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome riser and wheel handle stop. Stern -Williams SBC-1502, 24x24x12 corner precast terrazzo, 3" integral drain body, stainless steel flange on two sides. T-10-VB with vacuum breaker integral stops, wall brace, pail hook, 3/4" threaded spout. Wade W-8620, non -freeze wall hydrant with integral vacuum breaker. Fixture Wade W-3000 cast iron drain and flange, flashing ring, gravel stop, cast iron mushroom dome, deck clamp and bearing pan. Downspout Nozzle DSN Fixture Wade W-3940 cast brass nozzle with threaded inlet and flange. 2.4. DRAINS: A. Provide all drains as scheduled. Wade, Josam or Zurn are acceptable. PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210 - 5 1194-1 B. All floor drains deep seal p-trap. Floor Drain FD Fixture Wade No. W-1103 with 6" NB top, cast iron body. 2.5. INSULATION: A. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shallbe neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. B. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect.. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. C. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white draft paper and .001 inch thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber barrier between the foil and the paper. The foil and paper shall be adhered with a flame resistant latex adhesive. D. Insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville "Zeston" covers with taped seams. E. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. F. Domestic Cold Water, Hot Water and Circulating Lines: Insulate with 1/2" thick Manville "Micro-Lok APT 650" molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with all purpose jacket. Insulate valves and fittings with Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. Vapor seal cold water pipe insulation. G. Horizontal Storm Drains and Downspouts: Insulate entirely as specified for domestic cold water lines. H. Roof Drains: Insulate bodies of roof drain with one coat insulating cement to thickness of adjacent covering and cover with vapor barrier jacket of kraft paper and aluminum foil with glass fiber reinforcing fabric. Hubs shall be covered by building up layers of insulation until they are covered. The insulation shall overlap the adjacent insulation by a minimum of 211, bevel the ends and seal with glass fiber reinforced vapor barrier asphaltic adhesive. I. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Manville Type II "Aerotube". Insulation may be slit flange type or threaded on during fabrication. 15210 - 6 PLUMBING SYSTEMS r 1194-1 PART III - EXECUTION 3.1. ISOLATION VALVES: A. The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have j� an isolating valve in each line serving the riser. Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access doors in the ceiling or chase. 3.2. INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS: A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following specifications shall apply. B. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/811 per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. C. Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than 10" above the roof. D. Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provide valved drains to completely drain the system. E. Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no movement of flush valves, stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins. F. Gas Lines: All gas piping shall run exposed unless specifically detailed otherwise on the drawings, with special venting provisions. G. A drip pocket shall be installed at connection to an item of equipment and at each low point of the gas distribution system. Grade all lines to drip pockets. Drip pockets shall consist of a nipple and cap screwed to the bottom of the drop. H. Provide a gas cock, union and gas pressure regulator at each connection to a gas consuming appliance. I. All gas piping on the roof shall be supported as detailed on the drawings. Spacing of supports shall be as specified under "Hangers and Supports". F PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210 - 7 F 1194-1 3.3. TESTING: A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. B. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Hydrostatically test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks whatsoever. C. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall, be tested with water before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged, and each section .shall be filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than 1" in 8 hours. -- D. Gas Lines: Test with 15 psig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure drop (except for temperature correction) . ^ If any drop occurs, soap test all joints, correct leaks and .retest. E. Downspouts and Storm Drains: Test.with water under a head of at least 10 ft. System shall be tight at all joints with no leaks whatsoever. END OF SECTION 15210 15210 - 8 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 1194-1 1 r SECTION 15320 - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3. SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of ductwork, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, curbs and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. METAL DUCTWORK: A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ductwork insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, First Edition, as published by Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). B. Unless indicated otherwise, all duct shall be constructed in conformance with 1" w.g. pressure class. C. Make, square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of 1" in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1" in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of i" in 4" where conditions necessitate. AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320 - 1 F 1194-1 E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight _ at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. 2.2. DUCT LINER: A. All sheet metal supply and return air duct shall be lined. B. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 1" with Mansville "Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with neoprene on one side. C. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .26 btu-in./sq. ft.-degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 F. D. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with the coated side away from the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuffbond and adhesive type metal clips, Gemco, or equal, of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size of the ducts indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 2" greater in both dimensions to accommodate the lining. No voids are permitted. E. Use 100k adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA. 2.3. DUCT SEALER: A. All supply air ductwork shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to.secure a continuous air pressure sealant. B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of .48 hours before pressurizing system. C. Blue Glue or Hardcast will be considered equal. 15320 - 2 AIR DISTRIBUTION 1194-1 t F 2.4. AIR CONTROL DEVICES: A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the air flow in the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a volume damper shall be installed at each point where a branch is taken off to achieve the final air balance. B. Volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 22 gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances. Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in cases where neither dimension of the damper exceed 24". The metal used shall match that of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and bearings as required to resist corrosion. C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 2411, volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single point. They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish. Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. Blades shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic dampers shall have neoprene blade edges and stainless steel jamb seals. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity. D. Each volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted with an adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 896 concealed air split regulators. On exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts. E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off brackets. 2.5. FLEXIBLE DUCT: A. Flexible duct shall be a consisting of an inner slee moisture barrier. The inner of a continuous vinyl -coated to a continuous layer of coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4 i factory fabricated assembly ve, insulation and an outer sleeve shall be constructed spring steel wire helix fused -fiber glass impregnated and .nch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320 - 3 F 1194-1 flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories under their UL-181.standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M-KE for low pressure application. B. Flex duct shall not exceed 6' -0" in length or have more than 90 degree of bend. If longer duct is required use round sheetmetal duct with 1 1/2" thick duct insulation to make-up the difference in length. 2.6 ROUND DUCT TAPS: A. All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass ductboard as applicable. Provide each with a factory installed balancing damper, positive locking nut and air scoop. 2.7. A. B. C. 2.8 A. FIRE DAMPERS: Furnish and install, at locations shown on the plans, dynamic fire dampers constructed and tested in accordance with the current edition of UL-555 Standard For Fire Dampers. Dampers up to 64 sq. ft. for vertical mount and 25 sq. ft. for horizontal mount shall be classified for dynamic closure to a minimum 2375 fpm and 4 inches w.g. static pressure for horizontal air flow, air flow up and air flow down. Velocity and pressure rating shall include both in duct and no duct installations. Each dynamic fire damper shall be marked with a UL classified i-1/2 hour fire protection rating, the maximum Velocity/pressure rating for each horizontal and vertical installation and "for use in dynamic systems." In addition each dynamic fire ;damper shall include a 165 degrees F fusible link. Each dynamic fire damper shall include a 12" long integral roll formed steel sleeve furnished by the damper manufacturer. Submittal information shall include the fire protection rating, maximum velocity/pressure ratings and the manufacturer's UL installation instructions. Fire dampers in low pressure duct shall be equal to Ruskin DIBD 20 Style B. ACCESS PANEL: Access doors of sufficient size shall be installed in ducts to permit servicing of contained equipment including fire extinguishing equipment, dampers, etc. Where those panels are in insulated ducts, they shall be double wall 15320 - 4 AIR DISTRIBUTION 1194-1 r. panels with material to match the lining and of the same thickness. In uninsulated ducts they shall be single wall construction. All access panels shall have No. 310 Ventlock catches and pulls, No. 260 hinges and No. 390 gaskets. I B. Where access panels are not exposed or readily accessible above removable ceilings, provide access doors in the { general construction. C. Access doors shall be located as close as possible to fire dampers and smoke dampers. Where the size of the duct permits, the minimum size access door shall be 18" x 16". r" D . Each door providing access to fire dampers shall have a label with letters not less than 1/2" in height reading "FIRE DAMPER". 2.9. AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES: A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose. Refer to the tabulation on the drawings for types, sizes and accessories. B. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory finished in OFF-WHITE. C. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Titus, Metal -Aire, or Krueger will be acceptable. END OF SECTION 15320. r- AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320 - 5 1194-1 F I F I SECTION 15330 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3. SCOPE: A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS: A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL Hanger Hanger Hanger Hanger Hanger Hanger Wall bracket Pipe Clamps Pipe Clamps Pipe Rest Beam Clamps Adjuster SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. Copper Tubing 4" and larger 364 copper plated Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199 Steel lines 4" and larger 239 Outside Insulation -all lines 239 Plastic Pipe 108 + 109 All 150, 151, or 155 211 and Smaller 304 3" and Larger 241 All 295 or 291 All 249, 254, 255, 282, 280 All 2381 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330 - 1 F 1194-1 r 2.2. HANGER RODS: A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter Size of Steel Pipe or Copper Tube Supported 3/811 2-1/2" and smaller 1/211 3" and 4" 5/8" 5" through 8" 3/4" 10" and larger 2.3. HANGER SPACING: A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. Locate a hanger within 12 inches of every elbow or tee. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper and steel lines. However, hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or required by code. Size of Line Hanger Spacing in Feet 3/4" and smaller 5 1" through 1-1/211 7 2" and larger - - - 10 ._ All PVC lines 4 PART III - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS: A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location'of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this _ consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 1010" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper �- supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. 15330 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1194-1 F F F D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. F. Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps on beams. Under steel joists, piping may be suspended from rods thru the bottom chord with washers and double nuts. On piping larger than 411, verify the joist strength before installation. G. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall each be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. H. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances be acceptable as hanger material. 3.2. DUCT HANGERS: A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. END OF SECTION 15330 FHANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330 - 3 1194-1 I 7 SECTION 15500 - EQUIPMENT PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. 1.3. SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and l: certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements r„ 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - No. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 1194-1 5. Quality _ 6. Quantity PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. MOTORS: A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor..driven equipment. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the following requirements: B. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. C. Fractional 1/6 HP and Larger: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. D. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. E. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Motors shall have the minimum performance as scheduled below. HP RPM FRAME MIN EFF MIN POWER FACTOR 1 1800 143T 82 84 1-1/2 1800 145T 84 85 2 1800 145T 84 85 -- 3 1800 182T 86 86 5 1800 184T 87 87 7-1/2 1800 213T 88 86 2.2. STARTERS: A. Starters, except those furnished as an integral part of the equipment as specified herein, shall be furnished by the Contractor under Division 16. Coordinate exact starter requirements and details. 2.3. FLUE VENTS A. Provide and install flue vents on all gas burning devices. B. All such flue vents shall be constructed of Metalbestos double wall metal conduit and shall be of the sizes recommended by the manufacturers of the devices vented. They shall be complete with all couplings and other required fittings and shall terminate 2411 above the roof in a 15500 - 2 EQUIPMENT 1194-1 ventilator type weatherproof rainhead similar and equal to a Breidert Air-X-Hauster. Where any vent passes through combustible construction it shall be provided with a separation in accordance with the standards of the NFPA. All vents shall be flashed and counterf lashed into the roofing construction to the satisfaction of the Architect and shall be watertight. 2.4. WATER HEATER: A. Provide the water heater shown and scheduled on the drawings. It shall be a glass lined, jacketed, insulated package water heater. ' B. The gas fired unit shall be complete with draft diverter, adjustable thermostatic control, gas pressure regulator and all standard accessories including a thermomagnetic safety ,.. pilot designed to shut off gas flow completely to both main burner and pilot burner, if pilot flame is extinguished. C. Provide in the outlet of each heater a Watts temperature and pressure relief valve, with a drain line therefrom full size to the floor drain. Size valve according to the applicable codes. D. Refer to drawings for capacities. 2.5. HOT WATER CIRCULATOR: A. The contractor shall furnish and install an all bronze in -line circulator as shown on the drawings. The pump shall be Bell & Gossett Model No. 100, or approved equal, directly driven by a 1/12 HP self -aligning flexible coupled oil -lubricated motor, 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase, 1750 RPM. The pump shall be suitable for 125 lb. working pressure. B. The pump shall have a ground and polished steel shaft with integral thrust collar. The shaft shall be supported by two horizontal sleeve bearings designed to circulate oil. The pump is to be equipped with a watertight seal to prevent leakage. Mechanical seal faces to be carbon on ceramic. The motor shall be non -overloading at any point on pump curve. C. The motor shall be of the open,.drip-proof, sleeve -bearing, quiet -operating, rubber -mounted construction. Motors shall have built-in thermal overload protectors. D. The pump shall be supported such that the weight of the pump is not carried by the adjoining pipe. E. Provide a manual starter and aquastat to cycle the pump on a 20 degree F. temperature drop. EQUIPMENT 15500 - 3 F 1194-1 2.6. FANS: A. The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. B. All v-belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be so selected that the specified fan performance occurs at approximately the midpoint of the adjustable range. Motor mounting shall be flexible to permit belt tightening. The static pressure tabulated in the schedule is for bidding .purposes only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air delivery specified and if changing of the motor and drive is required it shall be done at no increase in the contract. C. Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof NEMA T frame design to meet horsepower and electrical requirements specified. The adjustable v-belt drive shall be selected for a 1.4 service factor based on motor horsepower and shall be factory set for the specified rpm. The motor shall be mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts. Conduit shall be flexible. D. Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan to limit the transmission of noise and vibration. E. Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled. F. Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and disconnect. G. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. H. Fans shall have factory applied finish. I. Power Roof Ventilators: All roof mounted exhaust fans shall be of the low silhouette type with fan wheels mounted horizontally. All fan housings shall be corrosion resistant construction. All fans shall be equipped with ball bearings, permanently lubricated. Fans shall be resiliently mounted. J. Exhaust fans shall have backward inclined centrifugal wheels. K. All fans shall have bird screens. L. Curbs shall be factory fabricated and furnished with the -r unit. It shall be of welded construction. M. Exhaust fans shall be as manufactured by Cook, Penn Ventilator, Acme or Greenheck. 15500 - 4 EQUIPMENT 1194-1 r 2.7. ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS'-. SINGLE ZONE: A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings, complete summer -winter rooftop mounted air conditioning units as shown and scheduled on the drawings and as herein specified. Lennox, Carrier or Trane units will be acceptable. Units must be of the same manufacture as indicated on the nameplate. B. Equipment: Each basic unit shall be completely factory assembled and test ran before shipment. Roof mounting frame and thermostat shall be separately furnished and installed on this job. C. The size of the complete unit shall not exceed those indicated on the scale drawings. If supply and return air connections require duct modifications from that shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall submit revised drawings for the Architect's review before installation. D. All electrical components shall carry the Underwriters' Laboratories Label. E. Capacity: Some latitude wil-1 be allowed to compensate for differing unit manufacturers. However, units shall not be submitted with total capacity less than 10k below the scheduled capacity nor less than Sk of the sensible capacity. F. Cabinet Construction: All components of each unit shall be contained in a single weatherproof casing. The cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel. Exterior panels shall have a durable finish coat of outdoor acrylic enamel. Basic unit shall occupy the entire roof curb assembly. G. All exterior panels of the conditioned air portion of each unit shall be lined with 1" thick fiberglass insulation. In addition the entire bottom of the unit shall be insulated with fiberglass. H. Hail Guard Screen: Entire condenser coil shall be covered with 18 gauge, 1/2" mesh galvanized wire screen. The screen shall be installed on the 24 gauge stand-off clips to allow 1" clearance between coil and screen. I. Heating Section: Natural gas heating capacity as scheduled on the drawings shall be furnished in the unit. Burners using 100k secondary air shall be furnished and operation shall not be affected by wind or atmospheric conditions. Burners shall have dual limits and 100?k safety shut-off. High voltage ignition and re -ignition and all necessary operating and safety controls shall be furnished. Standing pilots are not acceptable. Heat exchangers on all sizes of units shall be constructed of aluminized steel. J. Entire unit shall be AGA approved for firing with entering air at any temperature. EQUIPMENT 15500 - 5 7 1194-1 K. Heat exchanger shall be warranted for a period of ten years. L. Cooling Section: The cooling method shall be direct expansion coils with mechanical refrigeration. Coils shall have copper tubes with aluminum fins. Capacity shall be as scheduled on the plans. Provide crankcase heaters and safety protection for low suction and overcurrent. Units larger than five tons shall have expansion valves. M. The cooling system shall be rated according to ARI standard 210. System shall be fully charged with refrigerant. Compressors shall be warranted for five (5) years. N. Outside Air Damper: 25t outside air intake with hood, inlet screen and damper. O. Filter Section: Filters shall be factory furnished with each unit. Filter media shall be l" thick fiberglass or polyurethane. Filter face velocity shall not exceed 400 FPM. P. Blowers: Each unit shall be equipped with forward curved blower,wheels. Units up thru 5 tons cooling capacity shall have direct driven blowers with PSC multi -speed motors, or belt driven blowers. Units with over 5 tons cooling capacity shall have belt driven blowers. The belt tension shall be easily adjustable. Q. Vibration Isolation: The refrigeration compressors and the indoor fan system shall have rotating parts spring.isolated from the unit cabinet to minimize transmission of vibration. Fan motors 1/2 HP and under shall be resiliently mounted. The condenser fan motors and the combustion air fan motors shall be resiliently mounted. R. Temperature Controls: 'Temperature controls shall be furnished as standard by the unit manufacturer. Thermostats shall be Honeywell T7200 programmable type. 2.8. ROOF MOUNTING FRAME: A. A 13" high galvanized roof mounting frame supplied by the unit manufacturer shall be furnished and installed for the unit. B. This frame shall include a 21lx4° nailer secured to the sides to facilitate flashing. C. This frame shall exactly fit the unit and shall be approved by the National Roofing Contractors Association. D. This frame shall be set level and squared according to the manufacturers instructions and secured to the building as detailed on the plans. 15500 - 6 EQUIPMENT I� 1194-1 E. All connections to the unit shall be made from bottom within the confines of the frame. END OF SECTION 15500 EQUIPMENT 15500 - 7 L 1194-1 SECTION 15600 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS to PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the system. D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight hour days in a typical room on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire temperature survey period. G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone t TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15600 - 1 F 1194-1 must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: 1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation specified above. 3. Air quantities at each exhaust air handling device. 4. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terms of CFM handled. 5. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. I. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure -and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. r J. When opposite season modificationsare made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. 1.3. INSTRUCTIONS: r_ A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. END OF SECTION 15600 15600 - 2 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL'SYSTEMS r 1194-1 SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3. SCOPE: A. The work shall include furnishing and installing all rigid steel and flexible metallic conduit, intermediate metallic conduit, electrical metallic tubing, polyvinyl chloride conduit, wireways, pull and junction boxes and outlet boxes, together with all supporting devices and other accessories required. PART II — PRODUCTS 2.1. CONDUITS: A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall; galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with a protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to Standard UL6; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.1; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied. C. Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial Greenfield); conforming to UL Standard UL 1 and UL listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit and Cable Company, or equivalent. D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips as for flexible metal conduit; with polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the exterior to make conduit liquidtight; UL listed; Electri-flex type "LA" or equivalent. F RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110 - 1 r- 1194-1 2.2. CONDUIT FITTINGS: A. Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory made steel threaded couplings; bushing at all boxes and cabinets, with locknuts inside and outside box or cabinet. B. Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing: Join lengths of EMT with steel compression type couplings and connectors where exposed to the weather or in wet locations. Otherwise use steel, set -screw couplings and connectors. The connectors shall have insulated throats or a smooth interior so as not to damage the insulation -, during wire pulling operations. C. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 440 Series couplings at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. D. Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 5271 Series adapters at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. 2.3. OUTLET BOXES: A. UL listed of sizes and types specified. B. Sheet Steel Boxes: Sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication; Raco, Steel City or Appleton. C. Cast Metal Boxes: Cast iron or cast alloy with threaded hubs; Crouse -Hinds, Appleton or Pyle National. D. Boxes for Hazardous Areas: Cast metal boxes approved for the location in which used. 2.4. PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers. B. Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use standard outlet boxes. C. Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100 cubic inches, use cabinets as specified for panelboard cabinets with covers of same gauge as boxes, secured with corrosion resistant bolts or screws. 16110 - 2 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 1194-1 PART III - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS: A. All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. B. Types: All conduits installed in wet or damp locations, or on roofs shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits. Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits, intermediate metal conduits. In sizes up .� to and including 411, electrical metallic tubing may be used in dry locations where not subject to mechanical damage. EMT may be used in air conditioned spaces, such as accessible ceilings, dry wall partitions and exposed where 6' above the floor. EMT shall not be used outside, in t.: concrete, underground, in underfloor spaces, in locations likely to be damp, or exposed within 6' of the floor. Conduits installed below grade in slabs or buried in earth shall be PVC or rigid galvanized steel. C. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. Sizes of conduits shown on the drawings are minimum sizes to be installed. D. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12" long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use flexible metal conduit also at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. In damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3" of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1" from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. F. Damp or Wet Locations: In damp or wet locations make every effort to avoid installing raceways in a manner which will create moisture traps. Where they must be so installed, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110 - 3 r (P ' i 1194-1 seal both ends of raceways with an approved sealing compound to prevent "breathing" and moisture condensation within the raceways. G. Different Systems: In systems operating at more than 300 volts between phase conductors, where different phase conductors are to be run to a common gang wall switch box, install a separate conduit for each different phase wire and its return switch leg, and provide substantial barriers between adjacent switches in the box so that two different -- phase wires will not be the same compartment. H. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. _ Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit — systems. I. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. J. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and, in general, similar to the basic building materials through which the raceway passes. 3.2. CONDUIT SUPPORTS: A. Support spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. B. Vertical conduit risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps or U-bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the.opening in the floor. C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger _ material. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where conduits 16110 4 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS _ 1194-1 smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. r Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and } electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. F D. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. 3.3. INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES: A. Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. B. Boxes recessed in construction: Sheet steel boxes. C. For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-1/21, minimum depth with 3/8" fixture stud for incandescent lights which are surface mounted, wall mounted or suspended. D. For Wall Switches, Receptacles and Communications Use: Use 411x4" size with proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover, or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box. E. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep, unless otherwise noted or unless wall construction requires a smaller box. F. Boxes for Exposed Work: Cast metal boxes. G. Boxes for Outdoors: Cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. 3.4. INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger sizes than required by code where job conditions so indicate. B. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set box covers flush with finished surfaces for access. r RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110 - 5 1 1194-1 C. Identification of Pull and Junction Boxes: Each pull and junction box shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate the wiring contained inside the box. The label shall indicate the panel and circuit number of the wiring contained. The cover plates of boxes serving emergency circuits shall be painted red. Boxes serving other systems shall be indicated by name (Fire Alarm, P.A., Telephone, _ Data Cable, Nurse Call, Etc.). END OF SECTION 16110 .- 16110 - 6 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS _ SECTION 16115 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3. SCOPE: A. The work shall include furnishing and installing all underground electrical duct and direct burial conduit, together with all other accessories required. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. CONDUITS: A. Underground Plastic Conduit: Type 40, heavy wall, high impact rigid virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit and fittings, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and UL listed for direct burial use; Carlon or equivalent. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: As specified under Raceways and Fittings. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1. EXCAVATION: A. Perform all excavation work required in connection with the installation of the work under this Division. After the electrical work has been installed, tested and approved, backfill all excavations with suitable material under the direction of the Architect. Include the cutting of all sidewalks, streets and other pavement and repairing the openings in them to return to the surface to approximately its original condition. B. Perform all excavations of every description of whatever substances encountered and to the depths required for installation of the work under this Division. C. During excavation, stack material suitable for backfilling in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trenches to prevent slides or cave-ins. Remove all excavated material not required or suitable for backfill, UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 16115 - 1 r 1194-1 or waste as directed. Control grading to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations and remove any water accumulating therein by pumping. D. Use open cut grading and make trenches of the necessary width for proper installation of the lines with banks as nearly vertical as possible. E. Grade the bottom of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for conduit or duct on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. F. Except at locations where excavation of rock from the bottoms of trenches is required, take care not to excavate below the depths required. Where rock excavation is required, remove the rock to a minimum overdepth of 4 inches below the trench depths specified. Backfill the overdepth rock excavation and all excess trench excavation to the proper level with 3/4 inch crushed rock or the equivalent in coarse gravel prior to the installation of conduit or ducts. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting conduits or ducts is encountered in the trench bottom, remove such soil to a depth required and backfill the trench to trench bottom grade with 3/4 inch crushed rock or coarse gravel or other suitable material. 3.2. BACKFILLING: A. Carefully backfill trenches with earth, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale or other approved material free from large clods of earth or stone, deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6-inch layers. Do not use blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, or large boulders as backfill material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and will be requirement when so directed. Re -open any trenches improperly filled or where settlement occurs to the depth required for proper compaction, then refill, mound over and smooth off. B. Backfill open trenches across roadways or other areas to be,paved as specified above except that the entire depth of trench shall be backfilled in 6-inch layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density of not less than 9501 Standard Proctor in such manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value and permit paving of the area immediately after backfilling is completed. Along all other portions of the trenches, grade the ground to a reasonable uniformity and leave the mounding over the trenches in a uniform and neat condition. 16115 - 2 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 1194-1 F 3.3. INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT: A. Install at least 30 inches below finished grade unless noted to the contrary. Assemble and install raceways in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make joints with couplings and solvent cement. Fabricate bends of 30 degrees or more with factory -made elbows, or make field bends with proper heating equipment. Bends showing signs of overheating or flattening are unacceptable. Ream ends of all conduit before joining. B. "Snake" plastic conduit in trench, from side to side, with a complete cycle every 40 feet to allow for expansion and contraction. Maintain this configuration during backfilling. C. Where conduit turns up out of earth, or floor slabs, change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit below grade and outside of such structures. Do not extend any plastic conduit above grade. Make similar change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit at connections to underground pull or junction boxes. Wrap all steel conduits and fittings buried in earth as specified elsewhere herein, or use PVC coated steel conduits. 3.4. INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT: A. All steel conduit in earth shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit. Wrap such conduit with 3M Company 0.020 inch thick No. 51 "scotchrap" vinyl plastic tape, half lapped to give a double thickness wrap. Remove all oil, grease and dirt from conduit with a suitable solvent, and clean and dry conduit before wrapping. If conduit is pre -wrapped in the shop and then cut and joined on the job, wrap all joints on the job, overlapping pipe wrapping 3" on both sides of joints. END OF SECTION 16115 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 16115 - 3 p: 1 1194-1 SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3. SCOPE: A. The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors, together with all splices, connections, identification, including pulling devices. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER): A. Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, continuous without weld, splice or joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other imperfections; Okonite, Triangle, Anaconda or Simplex. No. S and larger shall be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall be solid. B. Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type TW, THW, THHN or THWN insulation unless the type is specifically designated or specified. Service feeders shall be type THW or THWN. Feeder circuits shall be Type THW or THWN. C. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type THHN or THWN conductors for wiring in proximity to boilers, and for motors and devices subject to high temperature because of high ambient temperature or convection or radiant heat. D. Lighting Fixture Conductors: NEC for the purpose. 2.2. JOINTS AND SPLICES: Type and size approved by the A. Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors or Thomas and Betts Series 54000 compression connectors. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. All compression connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools. Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable. CONDUCTORS 16120 - 1 1194-1 B. Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors; or UL approved electrical spring connectors of "Scotchlok", Ideal or T & B "Piggy" make. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. Split bolt connectors are not acceptable. 2 3. COLOR CODING A. Use standardized color -coding of conductors throughout. All color coding shall be continuous for the entire length of the conductors, and shall be permanent and readily distinguished after installation. In cases where the specified colors of insulated wire and cable are unavailable, such conductors shall be color -coded, as specified above, by means of Brady, or equivalent, slip-on colored plastic sleeves or plastic tape at all pull boxes, support boxes, outlet boxes, panelboards, and other terminal and splicing points. B. Neutral conductors shall be white or natural grey. Grounding conductors shall be green, or green with one or more yellow stripes. C. Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases, A, B, and C respectively in the 208 volt system. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1. WIRE PULLING: A. Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Pull no conductors into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause injury to conductors is completed. Use an Underwriters' listed cable pulling compound where necessary. B. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. C. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to facilitate future installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall have ample exposed length at each end. Identify each end of each line with a linen tag bearing complete information as to the purpose of the raceway and the location of its other end. All lines shall be nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds. 16120 - 2 CONDUCTORS F 1194-1 F r 3.2. INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER): A. Feeders: Run all feeders their entire lengthin continuous pieces without joints or splices, insofar as practicable. Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide as shown on drawings. Such joints shall consist of one through circuit to which shall be spliced the tap circuit. B. Branch Circuits: Not more than one power or lighting circuit shall be installed in a single conduit, except that one 3-wire circuit or one 4-wire circuit consisting of 2 different phase wires and a common neutral or 3 different phase wires and a common neutral may be installed in a single conduit. This provision shall not prohibit the installation in a single conduit of all conductors of a circuit with three- and four-way switching. C. Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control circuits, and except for individual lighting fixture taps as permitted by the National Electrical Code. D. Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. E. Home runs on 120 volt, 20 ampere Lighting Branch Circuits: Where length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use No. 10 conductors; otherwise use No. 12 conductors. F. Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes and pull boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. After a joint or splice is complete, insulate it with Okonite rubber tape, and Manson friction tape to make the insulation of the joint or splice equal to that of the conductor. In lieu of this, 3M Company's "Scotch" No. 33 vinyl plastic tape may be used if applied in at least four layers (half lapped in two directions), with all larger splices, terminals, sharp corners and voids being first protected by application of "Scotchfil" insulating putty. G. Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the conductor manufacturer's recommendations. H. Identifying Tags: Non-ferrous; stamped to clearly identify each circuit. Securely fasten tags to all cables, feeders and power circuits in pull boxes, lighting, power and distribution panelboards, etc. CONDUCTORS 16120 - 3 F 1194-1 I.- Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets and the like, using marlin twine lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. J. Cable Supports and Boxes: Install cable supports and boxes for all vertical conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. Boxes shall be of heavy galvanized steel plate construction, not less than No. 10 USS gauge, riveted to an angle iron frame. Removable box covers shall be secured with corrosion -resistant screws. For cables without a metallic sheath, cable supports shall be of the split wedge type which clamps each conductor firmly and tightens due to the weight of cable. For cables with metallic sheath, a basket weave or equal type of support shall be provided as approved by the cable manufacturer. F 1194-1 7 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART I - GENERAL NOTE: 1.1. r" A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including 1. General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3. SCOPE: A. Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring l devices indicated, complete with lamps, coverplates, etc. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS: A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices of Arrow -Hart, Pass and Seymour or General Electric are also acceptable. B. Classification: All wiring devices shall be "Specification Grade", and shall be UL listed. C. Colors: All devices shall have an ivory finish where r mounted in walls finished in light colors and a brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors. i i 2.2. WALL SWITCHES: A. For loads not exceeding 1500 watts at 120 volts or 3000 watts at 277 volts: DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO ra. Single pole wall switch 1201 b. Three-way wall switch 1203 c. Four-way wall switch 1204 d. Pilot -lighted switch 1201-PLC t ! e. Momentary Contact switch 1556 F F WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1 11.94-1 B For loads exceeding above listing: DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO. a. Single pole wall switch 1221 b. Three-way wall switch 1223 C. Four-way wall switch 1224 2.3. RECEPTACLES: A. Receptacle, 15 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding, isolated ground duplex: Hubbell No. IG-5262 (NEMA-5-15/R). B. Receptacle, 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex: Hubbell No. 5362 (NEMA 5-20R). C. Receptacle, 15 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex with self-contained ground fault circuit interrupter: Hubbell No. GF 5262 (NEMA 5-15R). D. Outdoor receptacle with self-contained ground fault circuit interrupter: Hubbell No. GFA315. 2.4. OTHER DEVICES: A. Weatherproof Devices: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast aluminum or cast alloy coverplate having a lift .cover. B. Wall Mounted Clock: Simplex Type 78, semi -flush, synchronous motor indicating clock, 12 inches in diameter, with Simplex No. 5928 flush outlet box containing a receptacle and hanger strap. C. Fluorescent Wall Dimmer Switch: Prescolite PA7 architectural switch of sizes noted on drawings. Where multiple dimmers are installed in a multi -gang box, follow the manufacturer's recommendations for derating the dimmers. Install control wiring as required by manufacturer. D. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet: Shall consist of an outlet box as specified under RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS with adaptor. Coverplates will be furnished by the Telephone Company. Where an outlet is shown, and it does not receive a telephone instrument, install a blank-coverplate. E. Data Cable Outlet: Shall consist of an outlet box as specified under Raceways and Fittings with adaptor. Install coverplate with 19/32" hole with bushing. 16140 - 2 WIRING DEVICES F 1194-1 2.5. FLOOR MOUNTED DEVICES: A. Floor Boxes: Walker Model Number as specified on sheet E-2 and all required accessories and with the fittings specified herein. B. Flush Power Fitting: Walker Model Number as specified on Sheet E-2 with 15 ampere, 125 volt, 3 wire receptacle. C. Telephone/Data Service Fitting: Walker Model Number as specified on Sheet E-2. D. Carpet Plate: In carpeted areas, provide Walker carpet plate. 2.6. COVERPLATES: A. Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, telephone, signal outlets and other kindred devices. B. For Flush Mounted Devices: Sierra Electric Corporation "S-Line" 0.040" stamped satin stainless steel except in unfinished or machinery spaces, where plates shall be Sierra "P-Line" smooth plastic to match devices. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1. CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION: A. At each wiring device, install a label on the inside of the coverplate which shall identify .the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected. The labels shall be made on the job with indent type Dynamo adhesive tape. Attach the label to the plate with contact cement or other suitable adhesive material. In lieu of a label, the panel and circuit number may be marked on the inside of the coverplate with an indelible pencil. 3.2. MOUNTING HEIGHTS: A. Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. B. In general, devices which are shown to be installed at counters or other millwork shall be installed above the counter or millwork, unless noted. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. r WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3 1. 1194-1 C. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by the Architect, install devices at the following heights. DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHT Wall Switch 4811 Receptacle 1811 Clock Hanger Outlet 12" below ceiling Wall Mounted Clock 121 below ceiling Telephone Outlet 18" Wall Dimmer Switch 48" Fire Alarm Visual Devices lowest point of 80" or 6" below ceiling END OF SECTION 16140 16140 - 4 WIRING DEVICES 1194-1 F F SECTION 16150 - MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment items. 1.3. SCOPE: A. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to motor and equipment wiring and control as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. MOTORS: A. All motors will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under other Divisions of the specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner. Where motors are mounted integrally with items of equipment, they will be erected in place with such equipment ready for electrical connection; such erection is not a part of the work under this Division. Where motors are to be installed as separate items, their foundations, anchor bolts and other provisions necessary to their erection will be provided as a part of the work of the Division under which they are furnished; their erection and final setting are a part of the work of this Division, and shall be done by specially skilled millwrights or similar craftsmen. 2.2. MOTOR STARTERS: A. All motor starters (controllers) will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under other divisions of the specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner. B. Install under this Division, including supporting structures, all motor starters and control equipment which are not shipped integrally mounted with the controlled equipment. Provide and install all wiring of every character, for both power and control, except that which is factory installed and shipped as an integral part of assembled equipment. r MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING 16150 - 1 r 1. 1194-1 PART II - EXECUTION 3.1. EQUIPMENT WIRING: A. Connect complete -for operation all items of heating, air conditioning, plumbing, kitchen, laundry and laboratory equipment, and all other electrical devices furnished by the Owner of under other Divisions of the specifications. Outlets of various types have been indicated at equipment locations, but no indications of exact location or scope of the work are shown on the drawings. Refer to the Owner and to the various Contractors for the work under the other Divisions for the scope of connections to equipment furnished by them and for the exact locations of all items. B. Request of the Owner and the aforementioned suppliers and contractors all rough -in drawings required for proper - installation of the electrical work, in ample time to permit preparation of the drawings and thus avoid delays on the job. C. Where disconnect switches -or circuit breakers are not provided integral with control equipment for motors and other electrical appurtenances, provide and install all disconnect switches required by the National Electrical Code and/or indicated. 3.2. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS: A. Completely connect for operation all items for temperature controls which require electrical connections, furnishing all wiring, conduit and labor. END OF SECTION 16150 16150 - 2 MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND'WIRING F 1194-1 SECTION 16170 - CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. 1.3. MANUALS: A. Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1.4. SCOPE: A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. DISCONNECT SWITCHES: A. Unless otherwise noted or required, all disconnect switches shall be UL listed and shall meet NEMA Standard KS1-1983 for Type HD heavy duty switches. Switches shall be unfused unless noted otherwise; quick make, quick break; in NEMA 3R enclosures if exposed to the weather; elsewhere in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless special enclosures are required. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower rated. B. Switches shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or ITE manufacture, equivalent to General Electric Type TH quick make, quick break switches. C. Where space does not permit use of the above specified switches, such as within weatherproof fan housings, etc., use suitable horsepower rated tumbler switches as unfused disconnects; General Electric Type RB or equivalent. D. Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters, provide auxiliary poles in switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary control circuits in starters. END OF SECTION 16170 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS 16170 - 1 r 1194-1 F F SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SCOPE: A. The work shall include furnishing and installing identification signs on all electrical devices. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. NAMEPLATES: A. Electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/4" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item or equipment served utilizing the equipment names shown on the drawings. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1. EQUIPMENT: A. All electrical equipment shall be identified by name utilizing engraved nameplates. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Switchboards. 2. Panelboards. 3. Motor control centers. 4. Dry type transformers. 5. Main switches. 3.2. CONTROL DEVICES: A. All electrical control devices shall be labeled to indicate the device served. All electrical control devices shall be labeled regardless of proximity to the equipment served. Electrical control devices to be labeled shall include but not limited to the following: 1. Contactors 2. Motor Starters 3. Relays 4. Disconnect Switches 5. Timeclocks END OF SECTION 16195 r ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 1 f. . r 1194-1 PM i F SECTION 16400 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit for review catalog data and drawings for all equipment items proposed for use under this Section. 1.3. SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, material and equipment for the complete electrical service from the power company service point to the building service entrance equipment. B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide and install an electrical service of the size indicated on the drawings. All service requirements shall be verified with the Power Company prior to the bid date and all additional costs (if any) shall be included in Contractors bid price. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. . UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT: A. As specified under UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS. 2.2. UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT: A. As specified under UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS. 2.3. SECONDARY SERVICE CONDUCTORS: A. As specified under CONDUCTORS. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1. SERVICE CONNECTIONS: A. The Power Company will provide and install a pad -mounted transformer assembly where shown. Provide and install a reinforced concrete pad for the transformer of the size and configuration as directed by the Power Company. B. Furnish and install service entrance conductors in conduit from the building, underground to the transformer assembly. Leave sufficient slack in the conductors at the transformer to facilitate connections by the Power Company. ELECTRICAL SERVICE 16400 - 1 1194-1 3.2. METERING: A. All metering for Power Company billing will be done by metering equipment furnished and installed by the Power Company. 3.3. SYSTEMS OF WIRING: A. Electrical Service: Combined 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz. service for lighting and power. B. Power Feeders: 208 volts, 3 phase, 3 or 4 wire as noted. C. Lighting Feeders: 208/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire. D. Branch Circuits: 2, 3, or 4 wire as is most convenient for the contractor or as required to properly serve the load. 3.4. LOAD BALANCING: A. The contractor shall carefully balance his electrical loads between the various phases.- When the facilities are under use at their heaviest loading periods, tests shall be run on the "hot" conductors in each feeder to a panel and any unbalances shall be corrected to a point that no conductor load shall be more than 5t high or low (maximum unbalance of lot) in amperes. 3.5. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING: A. As specified under RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS. 3.6. INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT: A. Install as specified under UNDERGROUND: ELECTRICAL DUCTS. 3.7. INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT: A. Install as specified under UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS. END OF SECTION 16400 16400 - 2 ELECTRICAL SERVICE 7 1194-1 1. SECTION 16450 — GROUNDING PART I — GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturers data on all products. 1.3. SCOPE: A. Furnish and install the various grounding systems outlined herein in accordance with the National Electrical Code. PART II — PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS: — A. Products for grounding systems are specified elsewhere herein. PART III — EXECUTION 3.1. SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING: A. Provide adequate and permanent service neutral and equipment grounding in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and subject to the following additional requirements. B. Connect the service ground and equipment ground to a common point within the metallic enclosure containing the main service disconnecting means. From the common point of connection of the service ground and equipment ground, run in conduit a combined service and equipment grounding conductor without joint or splice to the main water service pipe and connect it thereto with an approved bolted pressure clamp. Clean all contact surfaces thoroughly before connection, to assure good metal to metal contact. Where a dielectric fitting occurs on water main, connect the grounding conductor to the street side of the fitting. Bond the conduit to the grounding conductor at each end. Provide and install with ground clamps a No. 3/0 copper jumper conductor around the water meter. Supplement the water pipe ground with an additional electrode which shall be 10' long by 3/4 inch diameter copperclad steel ground rod. Attach the electrode to the water pipe and to the service/equipment grounding conductor. r GROUNDING 16450 — 1 s 1194-1 C. Size grounding conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code Tables 250-94 and 250-95. D. The building structural steel frame shall be grounded to the building service grounding electrode, using the conductor size specified in National Electrical Code Section 250-94(a). 3.2. GROUNDING RACEWAYS: A. Assure the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway systems, pulling up all conduits and/or locknuts wrench tight. Where expansion joints or telescoping joints occur, provide bonding jumpers. Where flexible metallic conduit is employed, provide a green -insulated grounding jumper installed in the flexible conduit. Install a separate green -insulated conductor in each non-metallic conduit. B. Provide grounding bushings on all service and feeder raceways terminating within switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, cabinets, and all other enclosures. Provide grounding conductors from such bushings to the frame of the enclosure and to the ground bus or equipment grounding strap. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC Table 250-95. 3.3. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: A. Provide a separate, green -insulated copper grounding conductor, with insulation of the same rating as phase conductors, for each feeder and for each branch circuit indicated. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors, and connect the grounding conductor to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect all grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and to ground buses in service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point _ of a ground fault back to the point'of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. Size all of these grounding conductors per NEC Table 250-95. END OF SECTION 16450 16450 - 2 GROUNDING ,._ 1194-1 F SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Requirements. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. 1.3. MANUALS: A. Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1.4. SCOPE: A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution'system. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. PANELBOARDS: A. Panelboard Cabinets: Furnish and install cabinets to serve the various panelboards, of sizes as required to house the panelboards. B. Cabinet Construction: Rigidly constructed of sheet steel of gauges conforming to Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. requirements; corners overlapped or welded; edges turned over to receive trim. C. Cabinet Fronts: Cut from single sheet of not less than No. 12 gauge cold rolled sheet steel; fastened in place by adjustable trim clamps which will allow plumbing; same size as the cabinet box if surface mounted; size to overlap the box a minimum of 3/4" on all sides if flush mounted. Provide each door with a substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. On doors more than 48" high provide a combination three point catch and lock with T-handle. Provide each lock with two keys, with all locks keyed alike. D. Finish: All back boxes galvanized; all exposed metal, including fronts, primed and finished in gray lacquer. PANELBOARDS 16470 - 1 1194-1 E. Panelboards, Generally: Mount all panelboards in cabinets as specified hereinbefore, arranged for flush or surface mounting as indicated on drawings. F. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where such a device is scheduled as"a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of device scheduled. Where a breaker or switch is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. G. All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic, indicating type unless noted otherwise. Provide all multiple pole breakers with common trip and single operating handle; handle ties between breakers are unacceptable. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. H. Connect all circuit interrupting devices with sequence phasing. I. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits mounted in a cardholder on the inside of the panelboard cabinet. Cover directory with transparent sheet plastic. J. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. and the building main panel shall be listed as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment." K. Submit shop drawings of each panelboard for review before commencing fabrication; drawings shall indicate number, size, interrupting rating and type of circuit protective -' devices; dimensions, gauges and type of construction of cabinets, size and material of main bus and lugs, and any other pertinent information necessary to determine -- compliance with the drawings and specifications. L. Provide each panelboard with a factory engraved nameplate which shall identify the panelboard name and voltage. M. Bus bars: Provide each panelboard with copper busbars. N. Ground Bus: Provide each panelboard with a separate equipment grounding bus bar bonded to the panelboard cabinet. Where indicated on the drawings provide panelboards with an isolated grounding bus bar insulated from the panelboard cabinet. 16470 - 2 PANELBOARDS F1194-1 2.2. LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS: A. Panelboards shall have the number and size of bolted -in circuit breakers as scheduled. Panels shall be of General Electric, Square D or Westinghouse manufacture, equivalent to the General Electric panels listed below. B. Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more than 42 branch overcurrent devices, the assembly shall consist of two or more separate boxes bolted together and covered by a common multiple door front; each box containing not more than 42 branch overcurrent devices. C. Panelboards for 208 or 240 volt Service: General Electric Series A, Type AQ with type THQB circuit breakers. 2.3. CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS: A. Panelboards shall have the number and sizes of bolted -in circuit breakers scheduled on the drawings, with main circuit breakers or lugs only on the mains as scheduled. B. Panelboards shall be of General Electric, Square D or Westinghouse manufacture, equivalent to the General Electric Panelboards specified below. C. Panelboards for 208 or 240 volt Service: General Electric Type AQ or Type CCB, Style CP; type determined by sizes and types of circuit breakers; circuit breakers shall have minimum RMS symmetrical ampere interrupting ratings as scheduled on drawings; no subfeed breakers permitted. END OF SECTION 16470 r r PANELBOARDS 16470 - 3 1 F1194-1 FSECTION 16475 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Requirements. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. 1.3. MANUALS: A. Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1.4. SCOPE: A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. CIRCUIT BREAKERS: A. 120 Volt Molded Case Circuit Breakers: One, two and three pole, thermal magnetic, bolt -on UL listed. Two and three pole circuit breakers with common trip and single operating handle. UL listed for switching duty, 15 and 20 ampere single pole. UL listed as HOAR type, 15-60 ampere, one, two and three pole. Operating mechanism shall be over center, trip free, toggle mechanism with quick -make, quick -break action with positive handle indication. Thermal -magnetic trip element calibrated for 40 deg. C. ambient temperature. Terminations for 10-30 ampere breakers shall be UL listed for use with 60 deg. C. or 75 deg. C. conductors. Terminations for 35-100 ampere breakers shall be UL listed for use with 75 deg. C conductors. Circuit breakers serving HID lighting circuits shall be specifically designed for HID circuits. Accessories shall be provided as shown on the drawings. Interrupting rating shall be as shown on the drawings. END OF SECTION 16475 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16475 - 1 7 1194-1 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: +" A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General I Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and !. Supplemental Conditions. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit for review manufacturer's catalog data and drawings on all interior and exteror lighting fixtures with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled by Luminaire "Type" in alphabetical order, with the proposed fixture and accessories clearly labeled. Ballast and lamp data shall accompany fixture submittals. Submit dimensioned drawings and performance data including coefficients of utilization, candela distribution, spacing to mounting height ratio, efficiency and visual comfort probability. 1.3. SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Where a lighting fixture has been scheduled on the drawings by manufacturer's name and catalog number, it has been done in order to establish a standard. Provide 10 day prior approval for all substituted fixtures. Any substitution to the scheduled lighting fixture shall be of equal or better quality. No substitution shall be made without the review of the engineer, who will be the sole judge of equality. It is the contractor's responsibility to submit sufficient data for review by the Engineer. Should a substitution be unacceptable to the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide the originally specified lighting fixture. 1.4. SCOPE: A. This section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS: A. General: Provide extra materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Deliver extra materials in factory packing. roll' B. Lenses: At the completion and acceptance of the work provide and deliver to the owner a set of 12 spare plastic lens of each type. The lenses shall be delivered in unopened boxes to the location designated by the owner. a LIGHTING 16500 - 1 1194-1 C. Lamps (Complete Set): At the completion.and acceptance of the work provide and deliver to the owner a complete set of spare lamps for each and every lighting fixture. The lamps shall be delivered in unopened boxes to the location designated by the owner. E. Ballasts: At the completion and acceptance of the work provide and deliver to the owner 12 of each ballast type. The ballasts shall be delivered in unopened boxes to the location designated by the owner. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS: A. Interior Lighting Fixtures: Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings and as specified herein. Should any designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixturesof the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called for. B. Fixtures: All lighting fixtures shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Furnish scale drawings, catalog data, samples of finish, distribution curves, and any other data required by the Architect for every type fixture. C. Electronic Ballasts: All 4 lamp or 2 lamp 32 watt, electronic ballasts installed in an interior space where the ambient temperature is 60 degrees F or higher shall be Advance Mark V or equivalent electronic ballast. The ballast shall be hgh power factor and UL labeled. D. Lenses: Wherever acrylic lenses are specified or noted, the material used shall be virgin acrylic with a minimum nominal thickness of 0.125 inches. E. Lamps: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the sizes and types specified; General Electric, Phillips or Sylvania. F. Incandescent Lamps: Inside frosted unless specified or recommended otherwise by the fixture manufacturer. G. Fluorescent Lamps: General Electric 32 watt t-8, equal to GE F32T8/SP41/RS. r 16500 - 2 LIGHTING 1194-1 PART III - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION: A. Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general construction and securely attached. B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Refer to the ceiling installer's layout for exact location. Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling panels. Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. Fixtures shall be securely fastened to the ceiling framing member by the use of four UL listed clips. C. Fixtures in Plaster Ceilings: Provide a suitable plaster ring or frame for each fixture recessed in a plaster ceiling. D. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. E. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. END OF SECTION 16500 F r LIGHTING 16500 - 3 i 1194-1 I SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2. STANDARDS: A. The equipment and installation shall comply with the current applicable provisions of the following standards: 1. National Electric Code, Article 760 2. National Fire Protection Standards: a. NFPA 71Central Station Signaling Systems - Protected Premises Unit. b. NFPA 72ALocal Protective Signaling Systems. C. NFPA 72BAuxilia-ry Protective Signaling Systems. d. NFPA 72CRemote Station Protective Signaling Systems. e. NFPA 72DProtective Signaling Systems - Protected Premises Unit. f. NFPA 72EAutomatic Fire Detectors. g. NFPA 72FEmergency Voice/Alarm Communication Systems. 3. Local and state building codes. 4. All requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 6. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) B. The system and all components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Fire Protective Signaling Systems under the following standards as applicable: UL 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications. UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station. UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 228 Door Closers -Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16721 - 1 r 1194-1 UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances. UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 1481 Power supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 1.3. SUBMITTALS: A. The contractor shall submit complete documentation for the Fire Alarm/Life Safety System showing the Model Number, type, rating, size, style, Manufacturer's Names, and Manufacturer's Catalog Data Sheets for all items to ensure compliance with these specifications. Copies of this information shall be submitted as required within thirty (30) calendar days after award of this work and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. — B. Only Fire Alarm Control Panel Equipment and Peripheral Field Devices have been shown on the Contract Bid Single Line Block Diagram. Specific and complete wiring between Control Equipment and Peripheral Equipment has been deleted for clarity. C. Upon Contract Bid approval, and prior to the start of system installation, the Distributor shall submit a complete riser diagram and layout of the entire Fire Alarm _. / Life Safety System, showing all interconnect wiring and equipment, to the General Contractor. D. All substitute equipment proposed as equal to the equipment specified herein, shall meet or exceed the following standards. For equipment other than that specified, the contractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment does in fact equal to exceed the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment. 1.4. EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS: A. All references to manufacturer's or supplier's model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. Equivalent equipment (compatible UL Listed) from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment. 1.5. GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS: A. All equipment and material shall be new and unused, and listed by Underwriter's Laboratories for the specific intended purpose. All control panel components and field peripherals shall be designed for continuous duty without degradation of function or. performance. All equipment covered by this specification or noted on Installation 16721 - 2 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 7 1194-1 F r 1.6. A. Drawings shall be the best equipment suited for the application and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or be recognized and U.L. listed as compatible by both manufacturers. QUALIFICATIONS: The fire alarm installing firm shall be the authorized dealer of the manufacturer and shall be duly licensed in the State of Texas under Senate Bill 925. B. That firm shall maintain a staff of qualified technicians capable of installing and servicing the system. They shall also maintain a stock of parts and components used in the system. 1.7. MANUALS: A. Include the following in the operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Complete typewritten operating instructions. 2. Wiring diagrams for the control panel with all terminals identified. 3. A parts list for the system identifying the components with ordering numbers. 4. A plan showing conduit size and routing, number and size of conductors and locations of all devices. 1.8. SCOPE: A. Provide and install a complete and operating 24 VDC, closed circuit, electrically supervised, zone annunciated fire alarm and detection system as shown on the drawings and described herein. It is the intent to obtain a complete system which will operate as described herein, and all equipment necessary for such operation shall be provided whether or not each item is enumerated herein or described on the drawings. The system shall include but not be limited to all control panels, power supplies, signal initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, conduit, wire, fittings, and all accessories required to provide a complete operating system. B. The system shall be wired as a Class A system throughout for signal initiating circuits and Class A or B system for audible alarm circuits. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16721 - 3 1194-1 1.9. SYSTEM OPERATION: A. The actuation of any alarm initiating device shall cause the following events to occur: 1. All audible devices and/or voice evacuation speakers shall sound continuously and all associated visual signals shall flash. 2. A red LED shall illuminate on the alarmed zone module. w 3. All exit signs shall flash. 4. All air handling units over 2000 CFM shall shut down. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. CONTROL PANEL: A. The control panel shall be housed in a cabinet designed for mounting. For panels located in new walls, provide recessed mounting. For recessed or surface panels located on existing walls or in machinery spaces, provide surface '- mountings. The back box and door shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel with provisions for electrical conduit connections into the sides and top. The door shall provide ._. a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all indicators. The control unit shall be modular in structure for ease of installation and maintenance. 2.2. SYSTEM CAPACITY: A. The control panel shall provide or be capable of expansion to the following capacities: Standard Indicating Circuits and Relays (part of CPU) 3 Indicating Circuits or Relays per optional module: 4 or 8 Initiating Zones per optional Initiating Module: 4 or 8 Maximum Optional Modules per system: 2 Maximum Initiating Zones per system: 16 B. Provide zoning as indicated on the drawings. 2.3. CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT: A. The CPU shall communicate with, monitor, and control all other modules in the panel. Removal, disconnection, failure or change of type of any control panel module shall be detected and reported by the Central Processing Unit as a module trouble. The CPU shall contain and execute all 16721 - 4 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 1194-1 custom programs for specific action to be taken if a fire situation is detected in the system. Such programs shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs. The CPU shall provide the following controls and indicators used by the system operator: AC POWER GREEN LED SYSTEM ALARM RED LED SUPERVISORY YELLOW LED SYSTEM TROUBLE YELLOW LED SIGNAL SILENCED YELLOW LED MODULE FAILURE YELLOW LED POWER TROUBLE YELLOW LED ACKNOWLEDGE MOMENTARY SWITCH SIGNAL SILENCE MOMENTARY SWITCH *• SYSTEM RESET MOMENTARY SWITCH DISABLE/ENABLE MOMENTARY SWITCH INDICATING CIRCUIT 1 ALARM GREEN LED INDICATING CIRCUIT 1 TROUBLE YELLOW LED INDICATING CIRCUIT 1 ON/OFF MOMENTARY SWITCH INDICATING CIRCUIT 2 ALARM- GREEN LED INDICATING CIRCUIT 2 TROUBLE YELLOW LED INDICATING CIRCUIT 2 ON/OFF MOMENTARY SWITCH RELAY ON GREEN LED TROUBLE DISABLE YELLOW LED RELAY ON/OFF REMOTE SIGNALING/MUNICIPAL TIE ON MOMENTARY SWITCH 'GREEN LED REMOTE SIGNALING/MUNICIPAL TIE TROUBLE YELLOW LED REMOTE SIGNALING/MUNICIPAL TIE ON/OFF MOMENTARY SWITCH B. The fire alarm control panel shall be a Notifier System 5000 or equal. 2.4. SIGNAL INITIATING AND ALARM CIRCUITS: A. Each signal initiating circuit and each alarm circuit shall be individually fused and be provided with an amber trouble lamp and a red alarm lamp. Each circuit shall include individual supervisory and alarm relays and circuitry so that a fault condition in any circuit will not prevent the proper operation of any other circuit. These circuits shall be identified by a lettered name plate showing the zone designation or function. All signal initiating circuits shall automatically lock in until the detection device has been restored to normal and the control panel has been manually reset. B. All alarm circuits (audible) shall operate on 24 VDC and shall be polarized to provide supervision of the field wiring. The alarm circuit shall be provided with an individual trouble lamp should any circuit develop an open condition. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16721 - 5 1194-1 C. Each auxiliary circuit shall have an individual trouble lamp to indicate a circuit wiring problem for whatever device is being controlled such as fans or doors or any other device specified. 2.5. INITIATING ZONE MODULE: A. The initiating zone module shall provide 8 fully supervised Style D (Class A) initiating device circuits. The module shall have 1 red alarm LED and 1 yellow trouble LED for each of the initiating device circuits on the module. B. The initiating zone module shall be provided with plug-in wiring terminal strips for ease of installation and service. The terminal strips shall be UL-listed for use "with up to 12 AWG wiring. C. The initiating zone module shall be a Notified Model Number 1Z-8 with an IZE-A zone expander or equal. 2.6. INDICATING CIRCUIT MODULE: A. The indicating circuit module shall provide four fully supervised style Z or Y indicating circuits. The indicating circuit capacity shall be 3.0 amps maximum per circuit and 6.0 amps maximum per module. If a short-circuit trouble occurs on one of the IC circuits, that IC-4 circuit will not activate on either manual or automatic command. An expansion printed circuit board shall be available for this module to extend its capability to 8 indicating circuits. The module shall provide 8 green on/off LED's and 8 yellow trouble LEDs. These LEDs will indicate the status of the individual circuits, and will also be used an indicator for the programming of the -- control panel. The custom label inserts shall be provided to identify the circuits using only a standard typewriter. The indicating zone module shall be provided with plug in wiring terminal strips of ease ofinstallation and service. The terminal strips shall be UL-listed for use up to 12 AWG wiring. B. The indicating circuit module shall be a Notifier Model Number IC-4 or equal. 2.7. CONTROL RELAY MODULE: A. The control relay module shall provide 4 sets of form-C auxiliary relay circuits rated at 5 amps, 28 VDC. These relays circuits may be programmed to activate on alarm from any Initiating zone or to operate from any combination of Initiating zones. An expansion printed circuit board may be provided for this module to extend its capability to 8 auxiliary relay circuits. The module shall provide 8 green on/off LEDs (Indicating status of the relay) and 8 yellow LEDs (Indicating communication error). 16721 - 6 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM i. 1194-1 B. Custom label inserts shall be provided to identify the circuits using only a standard typewriter. The control relay module shall be provided with plug in wiring terminal strip for ease of installation and service. The terminal t, strips shall be UL-listed for use with up to 12 AWG wiring. C. The control relay module shall be a Notifier model Number CR-4 or equal. 2.8. POWER SUPPLY: A. The control panel shall have a power supply with sufficient power output to operate the system. The power supply shall have surge protection for both input and output circuits. The power supply shall be self -protecting, lightning resistant and rated at 100 VA. A built-in battery charger circuit shall maintain batteries at peak power for supervisory and operating conditions during main power outages. B. The power supply shall be a 2 wire 120 VAC signal supervised unit. - C. The battery pack shall provide operating and supervisory power for 24 hours as per NFPA Standard 72A for local systems and shall be capable of operating all alarm signals for a duration of 5 minutes at the end of the required period of time. D. Provide gel cell batteries E. The power supply shall be a Notifier model number MPS-24BPCA or equal. F2.9. AUDIO SUBSYSTEM: A. Mechanical Design: The Audio Subsystem shall be housed in a cabinet designed for mounting directly to a wall or vertical surface. The back box and door shall be constructed of .060 steel with provisions for electrical conduit connections into the sides and top. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all indicators. The cabinet shall be approximately 5 inches deep and 24 inches wide. Height shall be approximately 20, 29, 37 or 46 inches, depending on the number of modules required. B. The control unit shall be modular in structure for ease of installation, maintenance and future expansion. C. Audio Subsystem Operation: Each Audio Subsystem shall be powered from a local 120 VAC source, and shall provide all power necessary for its own operation. fry FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16721 - 7 1194-1 D. The Audio Subsystem shall be capable of providing up to 4 channels of Fire Alarm evacuation signals and messages. The alarm evacuation messages may be made through a microphone or through a pre-recorded message panel. E . The Voice Alarm System shall be a hardwired audio subsystem for use the Notifier Fire Alarm Control Panels. F. The Audio Subsystem shall function as an integral part of the System 5000 Fire Alarm Control Panel. Manual or automatic alarm signals generated by the System shall be used to generate audio evacuation signals or messages which shall be distributed throughout the building's speaker circuits. All field circuits shall be fully supervised and power limited by the main control panel. The Voice Alarm System shall be fully field programmable and shall not require any special tools or equipment. G. The Audio Subsystem shall be a Notifier Model Number VAS-5000 or equal with the appropriate components as described below. The audio subsystem shall be housed in an integral wall mounted- cabinet with the CPU and no external cabinets shall be required. 2.10. AUDIO MESSAGE GENERATOR: A. The Audio Message Generator shall provide up to 4* -- digitally-recorded voice messages, each of which may be up to 24 seconds long. A built-in microphone shall allow paging through speaker circuits. Additionally, the AMG-1 produces a variety of tones including slow whoop, yelp, yeow, siren, hi/lo, and steady tone. B. A variety of prerecorded messages shall be available from the factory. Up to two pre-programmed messages may be installed in the system. With optional VRAM memory chips installed, up to two user -defined messages may be programmed into the AMG (one per VRAM). Each message can be up to 24 seconds in length, and can be produced at the AMG through the built-in microphone, or downloaded into the unit through a standard audio cassette recorder. C. The AMG may be commanded to produce any one of its tones or messages through a RS485 communications loop. Up to — fifty AA Audio Amplifiers may be driven directly by each AMG. 16721 - 8 - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 1194-1 D. The Audio Message Generator shall have the following controls and indicators to allow for proper operator understanding and control. Audio Level Normal LED All Call LED On -Line LED Amplifier Trouble LED Speaker Trouble LED All Call Switch Local Speaker Volume Control E. The audio message generator shall be a Notifier Model Number AMG-1 or equal. F. Provide the system with a Notifier Model Number VCC-1 or equal voice control center equipment package. The package shall include an audio message generator with microphone, one chasis for mounting the message generator, and a single -well press panel with all cables and connectors. 2.11. PHOTOELECTRIC AREA SMOKE DETECTORS A. Photoelectric smoke detectors shall be 24 VDC, ceiling -mounted, optical type using an LED light source. Each detector shall contain a visual status and alarm indicator, remote LED output and a built-in test switch. Detector shall be provided on a twist -lock base. B. The detector shall be of the photoelectric type. The r` sensor shall have a nominal sensitivity of 3.0t as measured in a U.L. smoke box. It shall be possible to perform a calibrated sensitivity and performance test on the detector without the need for the generation of smoke. The test method shall test all detector circuits. E. The detector shall require a separate base that allows for mounting to a 3 1/2: or 4: octagon box, or 4" square box. F. A visual indication of an alarm shall be provided by a r latching Light Emitting Diode (LED), on the detector, which may be seen from ground level. This LED shall flash every 10 seconds, indicating that power is applied to the .. detector. G. The detector shall be capable of supporting a remote LED annunciation. H. A special Test Meter shall be available to precisely check the calibration and sensitivity of the detector. I. The detector shall not alarm when exposed to air velocities of up to 1200 feet per minute. t: FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16721 - 9 r 1 1194-1 J. The detector screen and cover assembly shall be easily removable for field cleaning of the detector chamber. K. The detector shall utilize a base, which will provide a simple twist lock method to install or remove the detector from the base. L. All field wire connections shall be made to the base through the use of a clamping plate and screw. M. The photoelectric area smoke detectors shall be Notifier Model number 2451. 2.12. DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS: A. Provide duct mounted smoke detectors in the air ducts of air conditioning units where indicated on the drawings. B. Duct smoke detectors shall be 2-wire 24 VDC type with visual alarm and power indicators, and a'reset switch. Each detector(s) shall be installed upon the composite supply/return air duct (s) , -with properly sized air sampling tubes. C. Provide each duct detector with remote test station and alarm LED which indicates the alarm status of the associated smoke detector. For detectors located in roof -- mounted air conditioning units, install the remote test stations flush in the ceiling directly below or as close as possible below the roof mounted air unit. For detectors mounted inside the building spaces, mount the remote test stations on the wall or ceiling near the detector. Provide each test station with a typewritten label indicating the unit that the detector resides in. D. Provide each duct detector with auxiliary contacts for air unit control interface. E. The duct mounted smoke detectors shall be Notifier Model number DH400P or equal with Notifier number BRK RM851DH remote test stations and Notifier number AR-10 auxiliary contacts. 2.13. MANUAL FIRE ALARM PULL STATIONS: A. Manual fire alarm pull stations shall be non -code, non-breakglass type, equipped with key lock in order that they may be tested without operating the handle, and so designed that after an actual activation, they cannot be restored to normal except by key reset. An operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually detected, as operated, at a -minimum distance of 100 feet, front or side. 16721 - 10 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM F. 1194-1 B. Manual stations shall be constructed of die formed, satin -finished aluminum, with operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on three sides of the Manual Station in letters one half inch in size or larger. C. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on matching backbox, or semi -flush mounting on standard single gang box or switchplate, and shall be installed 48" above finished .floor. Manual Stations shall be U.L. listed. D. Manual fire alarm stations shall be Notifier BNG series or equal. 2.14. AUDIO VISUAL ALARM INDICATING APPLIANCES: A. Visual Only Units: The visual section of the unit shall have a minimum of 100 candela and meet or exceed the requirements of the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). B. The visual only units shall be Gentex GXS Series or equal with mounting as indicated -on the drawings. C. Voice Evacuation Speakers/Visual Indicating Appliances: The speakers shall be UL listed for fire protective service. They shall include a blocking capacitor for DC line supervision and terminal blocks for the in -out connection of the field wires. The back of each speaker shall be sealed to protect the speaker cone from damage and dust. The speakers shall have a uniform output over a frequency range from 400-4000 HZ. and shall have field selectable power taps of 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1,2,4 and 8 watts. Rated sound output shall be 96 dBa as measured in under UL Standard 1480. The speakers shall flush mount to 4" square backboxes 1 1/2 inches deep, with 1 1/2 inch extension ring. The finish shall be red/white textured enamel. D. The visual section of the unit shall have a minimum of 100 candela and meet or exceed the requirements of the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). E. The voice evacuation speakers/visual indicating appliances shall be Wheelock WM Series strobes with ET series speakers or equal. Provide with hardware to achieve mounting as indicated on the drawings. 2.15 AUDIO AMPLIFIERS: A. The Audio Amplifiers will provide of Audio Power (Q25 volts RMS) for distribution to the Speaker Circuits. B. Multiple Audio Amplifiers may be mounted in the Fire Alarm Control Panel using additional cabinets if required. r FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16721 - 11 1194-1 C. The Audio Amplifiers shall include an integral power supply, and shall provide the following controls and indicators: Normal Audio Level LED Incorrect Audio Level LED Brownout LED Battery Trouble LED.. Amplifier Trouble LED Audio Amplifier Gain Adjust D. Adjustment of the correct Audio Level for the Amplifier shall not require any special tools or test equipment. E. All terminal blocks for the connection of field wiring shall be removable plug-in and hardwired to allow for ease of field wire installation in cabinet or remote location. F. Includes audio input and amplified output supervision, back-up input, and automatic switchover function (if primary amplifier should fail). G. Amplifiers shall be backed up in groups (1 amplifier backs up several). PART III - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION: A. Installation of the fire alarm/life safety system shall be in strict compliance with manufacturers, recommendations. Consult the manufacturers control panel and peripheral equipment installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc. before beginning system installation. Refer to the riser/connection diagram for all specific system installation/termination/wiring data. B. All equipment shall be attached to a non load -bearing wall, and shall be held firmly in place. Fastening and supports shall be adequate to support the required load, and provide a safety factor of five. C. As indicated on the riser/connection diagram drawings, each system alarm point or zone in the system shall be uniquely labeled within the fire alarm control panel. Names of the system point (s) /zone (s ) shall be as def ined by the Engineer or the Owner. D. Fire sprinkler activation detecting system(s) shall each be indicated on a separate zone in the fire alarm control panel. E. All fire alarm devices shall be flush mounted in the walls that they are located on. 16721 12 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM F 1194-1 F. Fire alarm control panel will be mounted with the center i of panel 60 inches above floor level. G. The fire alarm control panel shall be flush mounted in the wall. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to final coordinate the proper wall thickness of new walls containing fire alarm control panels. 3.2. CABLE AND WIRING: A. Conduit and Conductors: Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment. Unless otherwise specified within the installation manual of the specific equipment being used, all field wiring shall be minimum #16 (solid) or #14 type in separate conduit, maximum 40%- full, and shall be approved for use as fire alarm cable. B. Conduits of proper size shall be installed from the control panel; equipment to field devices. All field devices shall be mounted upon U.L. listed electrical junction boxes. C. All splices in field wiring shall be made in U.L. listed electrical junction boxes. D. All electrical junction boxes shall be labeled as "Fire Alarm System" with decal or other approved markings. The Fire Alarm/Life Safety installation shall comply fully with all local, state and national codes, and the local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). E. The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution panel as FIRE ALARM. Fire alarm control panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be grounded securely to an equipment grounding conductor. Conduit shall enter into the fire alarm control panel backbox only at those areas of the backbox which have factory conduit knockouts. F. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. In the event of a primary power failure, disconnected standby battery, removal of any internal modules, or any open circuits in the field wiring; and audible and trouble signal will be activated until the system visual and its associated field wiring are restored to normal condition. G. Cable shall be the type listed for Fire Alarm/Life Safety use and shall be installed per NEC Article 760. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16721 - 13 t 1194-1 H. Cable for alarm indicating appliances (audible or visual or combination signal(s) shall be connected on a per zone basis. Cable shall be installed from the fire alarm control panel to all devices in that indicating appliance circuit (IAC) loop. The connection of the cable to that loop will be continuously supervised for shorts, opens, and ground circuit conditions. I. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29. J. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted control panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit. entry knockouts have been provided by the factory. -- 3.3. FINAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE: A. The system will be accepted only after a satisfactory test of the entire system has been accomplished by a factory -trained distributor in the presence of a representative of the authority having jurisdiction and the Owner's representative. B. The distributor will present a complete set of "as -built" Fire Alarm/Life Safety system drawings, and the factory supplied Operator's Manual to the Building Owner's representative and the local AHJ. C. The distributor shall make available contracted periodic system testing, maintenance, and/or calibration services. 3.4. ON SITE SERVICES: A. The distributor shall provide the on -site services of an authorized, factory trained technical representative to supervise all connections and fully test all devices and components of the system during installation phase. B. The distributor shall provide comprehensive training on the operation, proper use, and testing of the installed fire alarm system to the Building Owner's Representative, and the local AHJ. END OF SECTION 16721 16721 - 14 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM r 1194-1 F SECTION 16771 - PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT PART I - GENERAL 1.1.- NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3. SCOPE: A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install as specified hereinafter and as shown in the plans a sound reinforcing system including conduit, wiring, outlet boxes, speakers microphones and amplifier. The intent of these specifications is to obtain a complete system to pick up, amplify and distribute voice programs with the functions and provisions specified, and all materials to provide such a system shall be furnished whether or not enumerated, or shown on the plans. B. The system described herein shall be furnished by a manufacturer of established standing and reputation in the sound field who shall be able to refer to sound system installations that have rendered satisfactory service continuously for a period of at least 5 years. The equipment produced by the Rauland Borg Corporation shall be considered as meeting these specifications. Alternate and/or equal bids shall be considered qualified only if accompanied by working drawings and complete engineering data to support all claims. C. All equipment shall bear the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories and be listed by their re-examination service. All work must be done in accordance with applicable electrical codes, under the direction of a qualified and approved factory distributor, to the approval of owner and Architect. He shall also train the Owner's personnel in the operation of the equipment. D. The manufacturer or his agent shall maintain an experienced organization fully equipped and staffed to maintain the equipment in operating order. He shall be prepared to offer a service contract for the maintenance of the system after the guarantee period. E. The Contractor shall furnish the Architect descriptive material and full engineering data on the equipment he proposes to furnish. Approval shall be obtained from the Architect before final purchase is made. The manufacturer F. PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT 16771 - 1 1194-1 or his agent shall furnish the owner four copies of adequate operating instructions, including schematics, interpanel wiring diagrams and all information needed to properly install and service this equipment. F. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment, except tubes, fuses, and pilot lights, to be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use for a period of 360 days from date of acceptance. G. Reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such case may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture or form or type of construction which in the judgement of the Architect expressed in writing is equal to that specified. H. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment, if necessary, to meet structural, architectural, electrical -or mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on drawings. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. SOUND SYSTEM AMPLIFIER A. The sound system shall be a complete audio mixing/preamplification, processing and amplification system suitable for flush or surface mounting. The system shall be flush -mounted where shown and occupy an area no greater than 1611, 40.6 cm., in width and 25-5/811, 67/6 cm., in height with a backbox depth of no more than 3-7/811, 9.8 cm. The face panel of the system shall be no more than 3/4" deep and all edges shall bechamfered so as to not present an abrupt exposed edge. The sound system shall be a Rauland Model 4812 in Wall Audio System or equal. B. The audio system amplification stage shall deliver a continuous rms audio output of 120 watts to a low impedence direct coupled output at less than 0.1% distortion over an audio spectrum of 20-20,000 Hz, or to transformer isolated outputs at less than 0.4% distortion over the audio spectrum of 55-20,000 Hz. Speaker level outputs of 4,8,16 ohms, 25V center -tapped and 70.7V shall be provided. The noise level shall be no less than 80 dB below RPO from the line or aux input with controls on. C. A modular system design shall be employed to permit the use of optional input preamplifier modules in any configuration to a maximum of 8 modules. Unused module locations shall have removable blank cover plates installed. An independent level control must be used for each input. Overall system gain shall be adjusted by a master level 16771 2 PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT _ 1194-1 control. A fixed auxiliary input and line output shall be provided for easy user access. Input channels shall have an insolation of greater than 80 dB from 20-20,000 Hz with r level control interaction of less than 1 dB. D. The audio system shall provide power on and output clipping indication. Dual phone type jack, inputs and outputs, easily accessible for inter -connection of the user's portable recording and playback equipment shall be provided. The fixed auxiliary input shall have its own dedicated level control. It shall also be equipped with a cutoff switch to permit presetting the level control for inexperienced users. System controls shall be protected from tampering and/or mis-adjustment behind a locking hinged cover panel. E. The Audio System shall be protected from adverse operating conditions by providing a restorable circuit breaker on the AC line combined with the system power on/off switch. Power supply automatic thermal and short circuit protection, and output device automatic , thermal and 1 over -voltage and Safe Operating Area protection shall be provided as a natural part of the Audio System. F. The Audio System shall contain a 9-band graphic equalizer equipped with its own protective cover to prevent mis-adjustment of control settings. The equalizer filters shall be spaced on ISO center frequencies of 63, 125, 250, t t 500, 1000, 2000, 4000, 8000 and 16,000 Hz. All filters shall provide 12 db(+/-db) of boost or cut control. A switched high-pass filter and a switched low-pass filter shall be provided as part of the equalizer. A bypass switch shall be provided behind the equalizer cover to permit bypassing the equalizer operation for testing purposes. A mixbuss clip indicator LED on the equalizer shall light to alert the user to excessive mixbuss signal levels which may cause amplifier clipping. G. A full featured compressor with bypass switch shall be provided to permit automatic compensation of the system output level to variations in users' speech levels. The compressor shall employ continuously variable controls for; compression ratio, threshold range and release time range. The compressor attack time shall be preset at no greater than 0.002 second. H. The equalizer and compressor shall be designed as compatible modular components of the audio system. The c audio system shall be supplied, as standard, with two microphone input preamps and one auxiliary input preamp. These modules, along with the equalizer and compressor modules, shall be factory tested as integral components of the In -Wall Audio System. The performance parameters stated herein shall be obtained with all standard features in the system and operating normally. PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT 16771 - 3 i r 1194-1 I. Related functional stages of the audio system shall comprise a module of the system to permit ease of service and future enhancements to be utilized without replacement of the complete audio system; thereby, extending the useful lifetime of the system. The power amplifier output assembly and the system power supply shall also be of modular component construction for ease of serve and capability of upgrade. -- 2.2. INPUT MODULE: A.. The In -Wall Audio System shall be equipped with a total of two Rauland Model 4840 Low Impedance Microphone Preamps. These preamps shall provide a transformer -coupled input suitable for microphone signal sources. Equivalent input Noise shall be no greater than -126 dBm with a frequency response of 20-20,000 Hz +/-dB. Input sensitivity shall be 0.0003 volts with an overload capability of 0.07 volts. A switched 20 dB attenuation pad shall be provided to increase the overload capacity of the preamplifier module. Also, switches shall be provided to permit individual insertion of a low-cut filter or a high -cut filter. It shall be possible to provide phantom power to condenser microphones via an internal 15 VDC power source. A gain trim control shall be provided to permit adjusting the preamplifier gain for optimum signal-to-noise operation. Remote level control and/or muting capability shall be provided as part of the module without the need for additional add -in boards or internal components. The preamp module shall fit into and input slot provided components. The preamp module shall fit into an input slot provided in the chassis and it shall provide screw terminals for system wiring connections. B. The In -Wall Audio System shall be equipped with a total of one Rauland Model 4840 Auxiliary Input Preamp. The 4850 preamp shall provide an unbalanced signal input of 47,000 ohms impedance. The preamp module shall have an input overload capacity of 5 volts with an input sensitivity of 0.245 volts. Frequency response shall be 20-20,000 Hz + /-ldB. A switched 20 dB attenuation pad shall be provided for additional input overload capacity. A gain trim control shall be provided to permit adjusting the preamplifier gain for optimum signal-to-noise operation. Remote level control and/or muting capability shall be -- provided as part of the module without the need for additional add -in boards or internal components. The preamp module shall fit into an input slot provided in the chassis and it shall provide screw terminals for system wiring connections. 2.3. SPEAKERS: A. The Speaker Assembly shall be a Rauland US0215 8" (20.3 cm) dual -cone speaker complete with 25V/70V line matching transformer assembled to a Rauland ACC1000 Baffle or 16771 - 4 PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT 1194-1 F F approved equal. The circular baffle shall be 12-3/4" (32.4 cm) in diameter and 3/8" (1 cm) deep. It shall be constructed of 22 gauge cold -rolled steel, with a baked -on white epoxy finish which shall be virtually mar -proof. The entire assembly shall be screw -mounted in any standard backbox. B. The speaker shall be an 811 (20.3 cm) 8 ohm dual -cone type with the following specifications; frequency response shall be 60 to 16,000 Hz; ceramic magnet weight shall be at least 10 ounces (283 gr); axial sensitivity shall be 96dB at 1 meter with 1 watt input; power rating shall be 15 watts RMS; voice coil shall have an impedance of 8 ohms and measures 1" (2.5 cm) in diameter; speaker depth shall be 3-1/8" (7.9 cm). The speaker shall be equipped with a universal line matching 25V/70V transformer with taps at 5/16, 1-1/4, 2-1/2 and 5 watts. Complete assembly shall weigh 3 lbs., 12 oz. (1.7kg). 2.4. MICROPHONE: A. Furnish two microphones with 15 foot, two -conductor shielded cable with Switchcraft A3F connector. B. The microphone shall be a cardoid dynamic type. Frequency response shall be 90 to 13,000 Hz. C. The microphone shall have an output of -56 dB (OdB-lmw/10 dynes/cm sq.). The microphone shall have an acoustical diaphragm. An integral blast filter shall be provided. Low impedence connections shall be balanced line configuration. D. The case shall be machined steel. Dimensions shall be 7.38" (187mm) long, 1.78" (45mm) diameter, 3/4" (19mm) shank diameter and weight shall be 9.2 ounces (261g). A Model 312A clamp shall be provided. Finish shall be fawn beige Micromatte. Microphones shall be equivalent to Electro-Voice Model RE11. Provide each microphone with a metal carrying case. 2.5. MICROPHONE OUTLETS: A. Microphone outlets shall be Cannon XLP series on stainless steel plate. New microphone outlets and whiting required as shown on the plans. Floor microphone outlets shall be Soundolier #MRB-1. B. Label all microphone and projector outlets with engraved plastic nameplates. i PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT 16771 - 5 1194-1 2.6. WIRING: A. All wire and cabling shall be 1OOa shielded, two conductor, twisted neoprene coated, such as Belden Belfoil type. Microphone wiring shall be type 8450 and loudspeaker 8760. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION: A. Installation of the Public 'Address System shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's requirements. B. The in wall unit shall be fully recessed in the wall where indicated on the plans. C. All wiring shall be installed in conduit as indicated on the drawings. 3.2. MANUALS: A. The Contractor shall provide the Owner a complete set of operational manuals bound neatly in a three ring binder. 3.3. FINAL ACCEPTANCE: A. The Contractor shall provide final testing and presentation of the entire system in the presence of the Architect, Engineer and the Owner. END OF SECTION 16771 16771 - 6 PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT 1194-1 r SECTION 16930 - LIGHTING CONTROL PART I - GENERAL 1.1. NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit for review catalog data and drawings on all equipment items. 1.3. SCOPE: A. This section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1. LIGHTING PHOTO/TIME CONTROL CENTER: A. Furnish and install, for exterior lighting, a Photo/Time control of the seven day calendar dial type, which shall be suitable to operate mechanically held contactors. B. The time switch shall function to prevent energization of lighting for preset periods each day. When permitted by the time switch, photocontrol shall operate the control center to energize whenever natural lighting falls below 25 footcandles. C. The time switch dial shall permit different ON -OFF settings for each day of the week, with provisions for omitting selected days. The switch shall have a spring -driven reserve sufficient to operate time switch controls for at least 16 hours after a power failure. On restoration of power, switch shall transfer to synchronous motor drive and automatically rewind reserve. D. The photocontrol shall be remotely installed at an outside location and shall have cadmium sulphide hermetically sealed cell. It shall be fully temperature compensated and provide a time delay of at least 15 seconds to prevent false switching. E. Manual switches shall be provided to maintain lighting ON or OFF until returned to AUTO position. F. The center shall have two circuits as follows: r LIGHTING CONTROL 16930 - 1 1194-1 G. Circuit A - ON by photocontrol - OFF by time switch Circuit B - ON by photocontrol - OFF by photocontrol H. Photo/Time control shall be T-930LE or equivalent, in NEMA 1 surface enclosure with externally accessible override controls, or as noted on the drawings. 2.2. REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHES (CONTACTORS): A. The remote control switches shall be of the single coil, electrically operated, mechanically held.type. Positive locking shall be obtained without the use of hooks, latches, or semi -permanent magnets. B. Main contacts shall be silver alloy and shall be self -aligning with renewable from the front of the panel. C. The switches shall be continuously rated 30 amps at 600 volts AC and shall have an interrupting capacity of 3000 of rated current at 0.4 to 0.5 power factor. D. The switches shall be listed under UL 508. They shall be fully rated and marked for use with ballast lighting, tungsten, and general use loads. E. Switches shall be ASCO 917, or equivalent, with 120 volt coil and installed in NEMA 1 enclosure. Provide the number and arrangement of contacts as shown on the drawings. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1. OUTDOOR LIGHTING: A. All outdoor lighting indicated to be controlled by Photocell/Timec lock shall be set to be turned on at dusk and off at a pre-set time. END OF SECTION 16930 16930 - 2 LIGHTING CONTROL fillPut! - ,� O N O3 _ 40 q D _ q-- �-- �o _ i< Z �1� O 4O _ n 4p PZ — r �- 4. D�� n h b• 6` f yr oil 90 Y k 70 N : $z 20'-0' O Z p r•2' ivY $ Ul 6 i #� �g 7� r a• p �j �qa D Z k rn I I n'j r ♦ I 0 8 *� n ! I ;} 4 4 rn rn -� '• �' I I !L311 I I---- y CA 01P I i'- I — I 4 z m---- Qn « s° oAII x MWM ARCHITECTS INC. LUBBOCK I�CITY/�I C®QplMMTMVgIdl�IBRARV vD I -1 dl D�' LUMDq( WDLMq NORTHWEST BU9441RCH � � � •` AGNEW ASSOCIATES. INC. Q CONSULTING MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS FOR THE d I ROBERTS AND ENGW 1FiINC. CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS t CONSULTING STRUCTUEERS 0 z CT) ` a 4 ` VAMS T � yyy 4g Z-6` I pf AOWR ALE P a C p n 4z n Y -W i z I f I I I ®I It El-tl- 11 r- a WHIM 1 © If ww^sm s o�• A MWM ARCHITECTS INC. ROBERTS AND 7HOMA, INC. Icy 1 CONSULTING STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 'T AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC. CONSUl11HG HECW*NICAL/ELECIAN'AL ENGINEERS oil .,-Avr r 1 i �a a yi F� Itt•L-fU , I nl� r 1 Ad(-$Wr '~ so*v LUB13OCK CITY - COUHTYI LUBR RY MORlrHWE8T BRANCH FOR THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS M'swe amm�� :6;i0 �me mm I� ORSON, law1� ti a m D w� 4� m D p6 g r�� 6 � p �F Op� LZo rg �D g 62 M barn t a 08911 18901 a+°ji i oA MWM ARCHITECTS R08ERTS AND 1HOMA, INC. CONSULTING STRUCTURAL ENGINCCRS � I AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC. CGNSULTMG ►ECHMICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS �E D � � kl {�.ry ALLOW POR F s� yr oetecnor le Yid_M16 MOR7"WR3T BRANCH FOR THE C91TV OF LUBBOCK, TENAAS jac 41 Rj� R , f HHH thnnn HHH11 HHHAtnnn �riiinni HHH utlu .••nnn 1�� u11► li upu l...nnr �nnnni uu:1 1 I'll, IsLove N O SLCPE RO 11; I 4 poz 1 0 r wve wn Y Y tTYP! n z � � �o � N�� eLUaE IP � gI aLcPe i i cop M ARCHITECTS I LUBBOCK CITY — COUNTY L1®13ARY ROBERTS AND THOMA, INC. NORTHWEST BRANCH ° a CONSULTM STRUCTUW ENGINEERS FOR THE AGNEw ASSOCIATES, lNC. CUTY ®F LUBBOCK, TEXAS CONSULTING 4ECNAr+I[�5l/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS IrVWL . in Eno sm I -pill W—M .1 TOILET ELEVATION A-4 W.&LD %. -ra' - .era %,": 4, Iv 11 im"I IN Mrs �V"A i��iYitltltl a atls! ��I �Ir! tlM�tl! a LAV. ELEVATION I A-4 K.YD •r - w r VNTL WALL COVEGNG 'A' OVER4EAD 02ACM TOILET PARTITION. fTM M tl tl `� \♦ \\ \\ •-- 9- VNTL WALL i 1 Y 1 M 1 3 TOILET ELEVATION A-, 4r,.-A& Ir - F-w - - - - IlYli � go � �►,,i 4' VNTL WALL C AMr, G T„ 4 M — T LAV. ELEVATION AAA sCA&* tr - w VM7. WALL A Wr Tm. tlDM! G As• nj Iw eGMe ►r - T-M ��' 6 FOUNTAN ALCOVE ELEVATION •-� serve or - ry ie rvAW 9BOSMAL T ENLARGED TOILET PLAN .wm-o+e A-4 tlC.04L6 rr • W NOTE SLOPE FLOOR N TMET5 TO FLOOR ORAN ia1 ENLARGED TOILET PLAN A -A wit& it - ro NOTE- SLOPE FLOOQ N TOILETS TO OLOOR GRAN IO16 www TO oL1Alr'O CM&fiN PM T"Ir d r<AIM OLOW. s TYP. WC STALL PLAN A -A No OGK! wr •P'�an2,; i:rb NA* fRAa L7 FRONT ELEVATION n SIDE E.EVATION MA NO "GALE A , 10 rrfte w16 sa.e W16 Afc ►r a ■rArae�A rm . d� TO wAAsn oa.nwas • fiYL7[ 111R. Pt' CS bonwo- i L60M -0 s0+m rm r"m Q *AV* CLOMM 4A- PL- GLA55 kv2R'OR IVfTN 5.5, Woe 9 i� rP. LdNA 9PL4sR TOP I E EDGE ON W- PLYWD F AAM, ' II � II I , I+DAW AS P. UW P 49M ON WA'PLYWD WrTw 1-A RtA AMS GXLT TREATM IkA s" TO CO C SLAB, Q SECTION LAV r VMM A -A 9�AL8 r - I -a- N M TQ jY a rF s ro• o-r r•r a a r , rn 4 � fig v ro a Yoe wr r-r g ry rY N VARM D Mao- smev" r0-1 P-j Q v all ram• (1>j. 06 D r a gg rn 7 >d v: y ya F � o $ �d r $ nIr s v y y9 F n { n ¢� rn Fp D 1 y (6> u 1 na �, 1 .,* ` tit i NCf r1yr r; am. r•v �r rw r i oa MWM ARCHITECTS INC. LUBBOCK COTT1 - COUNTY LOBRART HWEST BRANCH CONUkT ROBERTS AND TFiOMA, INC. FOR THE r {{ COMSUlTN1C STRUCRfRAL EMC�MEERS !� I AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC. CITY ®� LUBBOCK, TEXAS 11 11111 CONSULTM MECM M1M/nEC"9M ENCNEERS �I ADO �c C D z O kill gg Is r Fa m Cv "l r z fill 6 $n Y{S i Il 11 r P. N2 . ; o MWM ARCHITECTS INC. LUBBOCK COVY — COUNTY IL�®lR�eRY D : m _ < LUBBOCIS `"0"'ND NORTHWEST BRANCH 0 ROBERTS AND THOMA, INC. CONSULT** STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS FOR THE TEXAS AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC. 4M f� 9 ' CONSULTm MECKANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS CIT u OP LUBBOCK. — op 6 t O o� LL n r-cr I m � p -4.1w N i� n 'sue �D .N P 1P X -0 oar eg JA. D� 4 F � � 1 1 12 gr p 'i H, m - I h n Y � q INC. LUBBOCK CITY - COUNTY LIBRARY ouu,o NORTHWEST 091ANCH FOR THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS